Skip to main content

Full text of "First Brazilian Seminar on Education of the Deaf-Blind"

See other formats


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2012  with  funding  from 

Lyrasis  Members  and  Sloan  Foundation 


http://archive.org/details/firstbrazilianseOOunse 


Tjaqao  Brasilia  de  Educc^ao  da  Doi.c- 

ABEDEV  C\ 


198  _  SAO  PAUL' 
I  BRAZILIAN  SEMINAR  ON  EDUCATION 

OP  THE  DEAF-BLIND  ':  "  ;':  "  " 


*  I     SEDAV  * 


PROGRAM 


ao  Paulo  November  6  through  11,  1977  BRAZIL 

OVE&BER  -  SUNDAY 

6      12:00/2:00  p.m.   REGISTRATION  TUCA 

R.  Monte  Alegre,  1024 

3:00  p.m.        INAUGURAL  SESSION 

Prof.  Dorina  de  Gouvea  Nowill  -  Brazil 
Prof;  Ana  M.  Rimoli  de  Faria  Doria  -  Brazil 

/    -  MONDAY 

9:00/10:15  a.m.  DEFINITIONS,  RESPONSIBILITIES  AND  RIGHTS  OP 
THE  DEAP-BLIND 

Dr.  Richard  Kinney  -  U.S.A. 

President,  The  Hadley  School  for  the  Blind 

10:45/12:00       DEFINITIONS,  RESPONSIBILITIES  AND  RIGHTS  OP 
THE  DEAF-BLIND  (The  History  of  the  Education 
of  the  Deaf -Blind  in  the  World) 

Dr.  Edward  J.  Waterhouse  -  U.S.A. 

Ex-Director  of  Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 

12:00/2:00  p.m.   LUNCH  TIME 

2:00/2:30  p.m.   ABEDEV  ACTIVITIES  IN  BRAZIL 

Prof.  Geraldo  Sandoval  de  Andrade  -  Brazil 
President,  Brazilian  Association  for  the 
Education  of  the  Visually  Handicapped  -  ABEDEV 
Head  of  SENAI  Industrial  Training  for  the 
u  Visually  Handicapped  -  Sao  Paulo 

^  Member  of  the  Brazilian  Delegation  of  the 

^  World  Council  for  the  Welfare  of  the  Blind- WCWB 

\  2:30/3:30  p.m.   TESTIMONIAL  OP  LIFE  EXPERIENCES 

'  Mr.  and  Mrs.  Leonard  Dowdy  -  U.S.A. 

Kansas  City  -  Kansas 

4:00/5:00  p.m.   THE  HANDICAPPED:  INTEGRATION  OR  SEGREGATION? 
Prof.  Jose  Geraldo  Silveira  Bueno  -  Brazil 
Director-General,  Division  of  Education  for  the 
Disorders  of  Communication,  Pontifical 
Catholic  University  of  Sao  Paulo  -  DERDIC/PUC 


PBOGHA 


I  SEBAV 


NOVEMBER  -  TUESDAY  - 

8      9:00/10:15  a.m. 


10:45/12:00 


12:00/2:00  p.m, 
2:00/3:30  p.m. 


4:00/5:00  p.m. 


NOVEMBER  -  WEDNESDAY 

9      9:00/10:15  a, 


10:45/12:00 


DIAGNOSIS,  EVALUATION  AND  EDUCATIONAL 

PLANNING  OP  DEAF-BLIND  SHILDHEH 
Miss  Ideke  de  Lew  -  Nederland 
Coordinator,  Technical  Department  of 
Instituut  voor  Doven 

REHABILITATION  AND  HABILITATION  OP  THE 

DEAF-BLIND  IN  GERMANY 

Dr.  Karl-Heinz  Baaske  -  Fed.  Hep.  of  Germany 
Director  of  the  School  for  the  Deaf -Blind 
and  the  German  Deaf -Blind  Center  -  Hannover 

HJNCH 

ORGANIZATION  AND  OPERATION  OP  CENTERS 
AND  SERVICES  FOR  DEAP-BLIND  CHILDREN  IN  THE 
UNITED  STATES  OP  AJSERICA 
Mr.  Robert  Dantona  -  U.S.A. 
Coordinator,  Centers  and  Services  for  Deaf- 
Blind  Children, 

Special  Services  Branch  of  the 
Bureau  of  Education  for  the  Handicapped, 
Department  of  Health,  Education  and 
Welfare  -  Washington  D.C. 

TESTIMONIAL  OP  LIFE  EXPERIENCES 

Prof*  Eneida  Athayde  Pinheiro  Werner  -  Brazil 
Prof,  Laura  Maria  Batista  Goncalves  -  BRAZIL 
Technical  Team&r  Multi-Handicapped, 
Instituto  Helena  Antipoff  -  Rio  de  Janeiro 


TEACHER  TRAINING  COURSE 

Prof.  Cristina  S.  Castro  -  U.S.A. 
Supervisor,  Department  for  Deaf -Blind  Childre 
Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 

PEVEIOPMENTS  IN  PRE-VOCATIONAL  TRAINING  OP  BLI28 

THE  DEAP-BLIND  SCHOOL  LEAVERS 
Prof.  Peter  J.  Binns  -  Australia 
Supervisor  of  Residences,  The  Royal  New  South 
Wales  Institute  for  Deaf  and  Blind  Children 


12:00/2:00  p.m.    LUNCH 


PROGRAM 


I  SEDAV 


NOVEMBER  -  WEDNESDAY 

9      2:00/3:30  p.m. 


4:00/5:00  p.m. 


PARENTS  COUNSELING 

Prof.  Elizabeth  Banta  -  U.S.A. 
Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 

TESTIMONIAL  OP  LIFE  EXPERIENCES 
Miss  Chan  Poh  Lin  -  Singapore 


NOVEMBER  -  THURSDAY 

10      9:00/10:15  a.m. 


THE  PROGRAMME  FOR  THE  MULTI-HANDICAPPED  BLIND 
AND  DEAF-BLIND  CHILDREN  AT  CONDOVER 
Mr.  Anthony  Jarvis  -U.  Kingdom 
Headmaster,  Condover  Hall,  Royal  National 
Institute  for  the  Blind  -  London 


10     10:45/12:00 


12:00/2:00  p.m. 
2:00/3:00  p.m. 


3:00/4:00  p.m, 


SOCIAL  PROFESSIONAL  INTEGRATION 
Dr.  Robert  J.  Smithdas  -  U.S.A. 
Director,  Community  Education, 
Helen  Keller  National  Center  for  Deaf -Blind 
Youths  and  Adults 

LUNCH 

ATTEMPTS  TO  IMPLANT  DEAF-BLIND  EDUCATION  IN 

BRAZIL 

Prof.  Nice  Tonhozi  de  Saraiva  -  Brasil 
Pedagogic  Counselor  for  the  Sectors  of 
Education  of  the  Deaf  and  Blind,  Service 
for  Special  Education,  Municipality  of 
Sao  Bernardo  do  Campo  -  SP. 

EXPERIENCES  IN  THE  EDUCATION  OF  THE  DEAF-BLIND 

IN  BRAZIL 

Teacher  for  Deaf  and  Deaf -Blind 
"Vila  Santa  Maria"  Primary  and  Secondary 
State  School,  Nucleo  for  the  Education  of 
the  Handicapped  in  Audio communication 


11    -  FRIDAY  . 

9:00/12:00 

12:00/2:90  p.m. 

2:00/5:00  p.m. 


MEETING  OF  GROUPS 
LUNCH 

PRESENTATION  OF  RESULTS 

CLOSING  SESSION  with  speech  by 
Dr.  Sarah  Couto  Cesar  -  Brazil 
Director-General,  National  Center  for 
Special  Education,  Ministry  of  Education  and 
Culture  -  CENESP/ifflEC. 


.  : 
■ 


I  BRAZILIAN  SEE5INAE  ON  EDUCATION 
OF      THE   DEAF-BLIND 

*   I    SFDAV  * 

by  Dorina  de  G-ouvea  No  will 

"Nothing  is  permanent,  except  change"  —  Heraclitus. 

From  Homer  to  Helen  Keller,  mankind  has  gone  through  enormous 
transformations  in  all  areas  of  knowledge.   Changes  have  affected 
man's  attitudes  in  relation  to  thor  men,  thus  modifying  the 
situation  of  the  "blind  in  society. 

The  attitudes  of  the  many  societies  in  relation  to  the  "blind  have, 
through  time,  become  embodied  in  prejudice  and  stereotypes,  which, 
in  some  cases,  remain  with  us  till  today. 

Berthold  Lowenfeld,  in  his  book  "The  Visually  Handicapped  Child  in 
School,"  studies  this  problem  and  establishes  four  phases  in  the 
evolution  of  the  image  of  the  blind  held  by  societies  in  general. 
They  ares 

Separation  —  through  annihilation  or  veneration 

Institutionalization 

Emancipation 

Integration 
this  last  being  what  we  are  working  toward  but  do  not  have  totally 
within  grasp. 

In  spite  of  their  being  related  to  the  evolution  of  the  history 
and  culture  of  peoples,  Lowenfeld  affirms  that  many  characteristics 
of  these  phases  are  still  deeply  rooted  in  the  behaviour  of 
contemporary  societies. 

Homer,  the  legendary  poet,  personifies  the  phase  of  separation  by 
veneration.   II  is  poetic  inspiration  was  attributed  to  supernatural 
powers . 

As  was  Homer,  the  blind  singers  of  China  and  the  so-called  "walking 
libraries"  of  India  were  respected  and  venerated  for  their  uncommon 
gifts,  but  were  considered  as  being  apart  from  the  societies  in 
which  they  lived. 


Helen  Keller,  just  as  Nicholas  Saunderson  and  Maria  Theresia  von 

Paradis  in  the  eighteenth  century,  symbolize  the  phase  of  emancipat- 
ion. 

They  are  the  self-taught,  who  through  their  creative  accomplish- 
ments, persistence,  and  dynamism,  inspired  the  first  teachers  of 
the  blind,  the  visually  handicapped,  and  the  deaf -blind* 

Concrete  movements  for  the  education  of  the  blind  are  relatively 
recent.   It  was  only  at  the  end  of  the  eighteenth  century  that  a 
French  idealist,  Valentin  Hauy,  decided  to  teach  a  young  boy, 
Francois  lesueur,  to  whom  he  gave  an  aim  every  Sunday  as  he  left 
mass  at  one  of  the  churches  in  Paris. 

Becoming  enthusiastic  over  Lesueur' s  perception,  Hauy  began  to 
teach  him.   His  success  with  the  lad  led  him  to  experiment  in  the 
education  of  other  blind  children. 

This  simple,  humble  event,  made  bright  by  the  spirit  of  a  great 
teacher,  from  there  on  opened  the  doors  of  learning  and  culture 
to  thousands  of  blind  people. 

Among  the  many  things  to  his  credit  is  Hatty  systematization  of 
the  education  of  the  blind,  trying  to  keep  it  as  proximate  as 
possible  with  that  of  the  sighted. 

The  eighteenth  century,  also  known  as  "the  century  of  the  beggars" ? 
in  its  later  decades,  brought  together,  in  Prance,  philosophers 
and  writers  interested  in  the  characteristics  of  human  thought 
and  intelligence  —  such  as  teachers  of  the  caliber  of  Valentin 
Hauy  and  the  Abbe  de  l'Epee,  who  devoted  himself  to  the  education 
of  the  deaf. 

Without  a  doubt,  the  example  of  self-educated  blind,  such  as 
Weissemburg  and  Maria  Theresia  von  Paradis,  encouraged  Hauy  to 
work  on  his  educational  experiments,  for,  -until  1784,  nothing 
had  been  documented  on  this  type  of  teaching  other  than  Diderot's 
"Lettre  sur  les  Aveugles" ,  published  in  1749. 

Diderot  was  the  first  person  to  analyze  the  thought  processes  of 
the  blind  and  to  suggest  some  principles  for  their  complete  educat- 
ion.  / 


Diderot's  interest  was  theoretical  and  inspired  on  works  such  as 
Locke's  "Essay  Concerning  Human  Understanding".   This  essay  is  on 
Molyneux',  experiment  with  the  possibility  of  a  person  blind  frcn 
"birth,  upon  acquiring  eight  through  the  removal  of  a  cataract, 
being  able  to  visually  recognize  forms  such  as  cubes  and  spheres, 
which  he  had  known  by  touch.   Molyneux  proves,  through  facts, 
that  transform!  of  the  sense  of  touch  to  that  of  sight  does  not 
exist. 

Still  analyzing  theories  of  Locke  and  Berkeley,  Diderot  in  his 
"Letter  on  the  Blind"  establishes  three  basic  principles  for  the 
teaching  of  the  blind; 

1.  That  the  sense  of  touch  of  the  blind  does  not  become  sharper 
through  loss  of  vision,  but  that  the  loss  of  one  sense- 
exacts  an  increase  in  attention  which  feeds  on  impressions 
of  the  other  senses. 

2.  That  we  should  base  a  blind  person's  education  on  what  he 
has,  not  on  what  he  has  lost,  principally  on  his  contact 
with  the  world. 

3.  That  the  deaf -blind  can  be  educated,  through  the  patient  and 
insistent  relating  of  tactile  signs  with  the  object  touched. 

The  third  of  these  principles  was,  therefore,  pronounced  almost  a 
century  before  the  training  of  Laura  Bridgman,  deaf -blind, 
predecessor  of  Helen  Keller,  and  contemporary  of  Ann  Sullivan  at 
the  Perkins  Institute  in  the  United  States. 

Laura  Birdgman's  accomplishments,  though  elementary,  must  have 
struck  deep  in  that  extremely  creative  soul  who  was  Ann  Sullivan. 

Summoned  by  the  Keller  family,  this  simple  teacher  from  the  Perkins 
Institute  began  to  live  with  Helen  and  study  a  means  oc  communicat- 
ion between  the  deaf -blind  girl  and  the  world  about  her. 

Ann  is  an  example  of  creativity,  of  love,  and  perseverance.   She 
never  allowed  herself  to  be  discouraged  by  the  daily  frustrations 
of  the  inglorious  task  of  establishing  a  link  between  the 

/. 


-  4  - 

immensity  of  an  objective  and  the  tiny  mind  confined  "by  the  dark 
obscurity  of  the  double  sensorial  insensibility. 

A  fountain  of  crystalline  water  and  the  energetic  strenth  struck  a 
spark  in  a  fine  aind  and  brought  about  that  teaching  phenomenon, 
which,  today,  the  world  knows  as  the  Miracle  of  Ann  Suulivan. 

A  whole  educational  process  was  built  by  these  exceptionally 
gifted  women  in  spite  of  Helen's  double  handicap.  Prom  their 
constant  work  benefits  today  fall  ur  upon  hundreds  of  deaf-blind 
all  over  the  world. 

Ann,  like  Hauy,  began  a  system,  created  methods,  developed 
procedures  that  have  been  consolidated  into  the  methodology  now 
adopted  for  the  education  of  the  deaf -blind. 

I  still  remember  with  admiration  and  enthusiasm  my  own  stay  of  a 
few  days  at  Perkins  Institute's  Fisher's  Cottage  in  Boston,  with 
a  group  of  deaf -blind  girls.   Observation  of  their  agility  in  the 
.activities  of  daily  life,  01    the  advantage  they  took  of  their 
school  disciplines,  of  the  tremendous  potential  of  their  remaining 
senses  strengthened  my  belief  in  the  unknown  and  unexplored 
capabilities  of  the  human  being.   They  were  unforgettable  days. 

The  week,  which  begins  today,  in  the  midst  of  participants 
handicapped  in  audio-communication,  will  also  be  for  all  of  us  an 
experience  rich  in  information,  inspiration,  and  achievement  which 
will  be  a  high  point  in  the  education  of  the  blind  in  Brazil. 

In  several  countries  of  the  world,  innumerable  schools  and 
rehabilitation  centers,  scientifically  equipped,  habilitate 
hundreds  of  human  beings  multi-handicapped,  preparing  them  for  a 
normal  life  of  useful,  profitable  work. 

A  number  of  dedicated  teachers  throughout  tho  world  devote  them- 
selves to  the  difficult  task  of  constructing  an  invisible  network 
of  communication  among  the  souls  and  hearts  blocked  by  deficiency 
and  the  colorful  and  sonorous  world. 

To  worthy,  and,  at  times,  anonymous  teachers,  we  owe  the  opportunity 
of  haying  with  us  today  people  such  as  Richard  Kinney  and  Mr.  and 

/. 


-  5  - 
Leonard  Dowdy.   They  are  living  examples  of  the  inexhaustable 
human  potential  and  incontestable  evidence  of  the  validity  of  the 
methods  and  procedures  that  can  he  used  by  specialists. 

In  the  area  of  special  education,  presently,  the  great  preoccupation 
of  educators  and  other  professionals  is,  undoubtedly,  the  atady  of 
the  multi -handicapped. 

"The  average  of  incidence  of  blind  children  in  the  population  in 
general  con  decrease  as  nedical  science  advances,  but  we  can  affirm 
that  in  absolute  numbers  blind  children  with  multi-handicaps  will 
not  decrease".   The  work  that  illustrates  this  is  a  study  done  in 
1966  by  a  group  of  researchers  of  the  American  Foundation  for  the 
Blind,  titled  "Blind  Children  with  Multiple  Handicaps". 

As  campigns  for  prevention  of  blindness  force  down  the  nurber  of 
blind,  other  progress,  principally  the  survival  of  the  prematurely 
born,  are  and  will  be  propionate  to  the  existence  of  double  or 
ziulti -handicapped  people.   Certain  epidemic  diseases,  such  as 
rubella,  for  which  there  is  no  mass  vaccination,  are  factors 
for  the  increase  in  the  number  of  shildren  with  congenital  double 
or  multiple  handicaps. 

Certainly,  medical  science,  in  its  continual  process  of  evolution, 
will  find  the  ways  and  means  to  control  and  diminish  the  high 
number  of  multiple  handicapped  foreseen  by  recent  research  in  this 
specialized  area. 

The  precision  of  tiie  equipment  in  baby  wards,  vaccinations,  and 
programs  for  early  stimulation  may  contribute  to  a  decrease  in  the 
number  of  multi-handicapped.   In  the  reality  of  today,  however,  the 
deaf-blind  do  exist,  and  his  education  and  his  adjustment  to  life 
is  a  serious  community  responsibility.   This  responsibility  is 
magnificently  expressed  in  the  Declaration  of  the  Eights  of 
Disabled  Persons,  approved  by  the  XXX  General  Assembly  of  the  United 
Nations  and  which  says  in  Article  8^3 

/. 


-  6  - 
"The  handicapped  have  the  right  to  have  their  special  necessities 
taken  into  consideration  on  all  levels  of  economic  and  social  plan- 
ning," . 

What  is,  then,  the  situation  of  the  education  and  prof essionaliza-  ■ 
Hon  of  the  deaf -blind  in  Brazil? 

A  whole  analysis  of  this  intricate  problen  nust  he  made,  from  the 
locating  of  these  people  'by  age  level  to  the  preparation  of  human 
resources  and  the  creation  of  material  resources  adequate  to  the 
.  specif icneeds  of  this  group  of  human  beings.   In  fact,  those  people 
are  even  today  still  practically  unknown  of  by  government  and 
private,  authorities  in  this  country,  in  the  area  of  special 
education. 

Two  dedicated  and  untiring  pioneers,  Nice  Saraiva  and  Ncusa 
Bassetto,  have  been  fighting  to  awaken  educators  and  the  govern- 
ment to  education  of  the  deaf -blind.   Their  great  effort  has 
today  reached  a  climax  with  the  opening  of  the  I  "Brazilian  Seminar 
on  Education  of  the  Deaf -Blind, 

The  Brazilian  Association  for  the  Education  of  the  Visually 
Handicapped  (ABEDEV),  thanks  to  the  farsightedness  of  its  President, 
Professor  G-eraldo  Sandoval  de  Andrade,  concentrated  its  best  efforts 
to  bringing  together  representatives  of  several  countries  and 
Brazilian  professionals  in  an  movement  v/orthy  of  our  admiration 
and  applause. 

Prom  the  emancipation  of  Helen  Keller  to  the  integration  of  Richard 
Kinney,  the  historical,  social,  and  scientific  transformations 
have  come  about  with  dizzying  speed,  characteristic  of  the  spacial 
era  of  which  all  of  us  are  a  part. 

These  transformation  have  led  men  of  today,  in  spite  of  the 
skepticism  of  many,  to  try  to  better  the  conditions  of  life  of 
their  fellow  men.   This  is  the  sublime  mission  of  the  educators 
and  other  professionals  involved  in  special  education. 

We  chose,  freely,  our  field  of  work.  Our  part  in  the  worldwide 
task  of  building  a  world  where  social  justice  prevails  depends 
greatly  on  how  we  use  our  strength  and  resources  to  change  unjust 

/. 


preconcepts  into  valid  concepts  and  to  inform  the  community  as 
to  the  hidden  and  unexplored  abilities  of  the  human  "being. 

History  is  full  of  examples  of  those  who  knew  how  to  win,  dirt  does 
not  always  tell  of  the  failures  they  had  to  overcome.   We  cannot 
he  triumplhant  at  the  start,  hut  laborers  on  a  long  and  arduous 
job,  the  integration  of  the  deaf -blind  in  education,  at  work,  and 
in  ~jfcn 

In  moments  of  frustration  and  uncertainty,  what  serves  us  as  an 
example  is  the  constructive  thought  of  the  inspirer  of  this 
integration,  Helen  Keller,  when  she  saidj 

-"  When  one  door  of  happiness  closes,  another  opens;   many  times, 
however,  we  look  for  such  a  long  time  at  the  closed  door  that  we 
do  not  see  the  one  that  has  opened  for  us." 


CURRICULUM  VITAE  -  Resume 
Jose  G-eraldo  Silveira  Bueno 


Rua  Cotoxo,  749 
05021  Sao  Paulo  -  SP 


PERSONAL 


Bonis 

Marital  Status 

Wife  s 


July  9,  1944  in  Sao  Paulo,  SP. 

Married 

Marcia  Maria  Sinonetti  Silveira  Bueno 


E  D  U  CA  T  I  0  N 

School  of  Education 
University  of  Sao  Paulo 

Pontifical  University  of 
Sao  Paulo 
Specialization  Course 

OTHER  COURSES 


Degree 


Year 


Licensed,  as  a  1971 
Teacher 


Audiology    "began  in  1974. 


Area 


School 
Supervisor 


Audiovisual  Methods  for  Teaching 
Brazilian  Institute  for  Social  Studies 


UNESCO  -  SP  -  1968 


-  The  Development  of  Language  and  Communication  Disorders 
given  by  Dr.  Gertrude  L*  Wyatt 

Pontifical  Catholic  University  of  Rio  de  Janeiro 

-  The  Hearinf  Impaired  Child  -  Hearing  Education  and  Language 
Development 

"by  Dr.  C-uy  Pordoncini  -  DERDl/PUCSP ,  August  1971 

PRESENT  PROFESSIONAL  ACTIVITIES 


Pi r e c to r-G- en oral  -  Division  of  Education  and  Rehabilitation  of 

"  "  "       Communication  Disorders  -  DERDIC  -  PONTIFICAL 

University  of  Sao  Paulo  -  PUC/Sao  Paulo. 

Uni ve r s i t y  Pro lessor  -  Education  as  Applied  to  Communication 

Disorders,  Courses  Phono audio logy,  Pontifical 
University  of  Sao  Paulo 

Uni vo rsit y  Pro f esso r  -  Theories  of  Education  as  Applied  to 

Communication  Disorders,  Courses  Phono audio logy, 
Pontifical  University  of  Campinas 

Universi ty  Prof o sso r  -  The  Structure  and  Function  of  Teaching  in 
Elementary  and  Secondary  Schools,  Didactics, 
Courses  Physical  Education,  The  Educational 
Society  of  Guarulhos  -  SP. 


Jose  G-eraldo  Silveira  Bueno  pg.  2. 

TEACHING-  ACTIVITIES 

In  elementary  and  secondary  schools s 

-  Instructor  at  "I  L,  Peretz"  Recreation  Center 

Brazilian  Israeli ti  School  "Scholem  Aleichem"  -  Sao  Paulo,  1964 

-  Teacher  of  Brazilian  History 

Sao  Paulo  Educational  Institute  -  BERDIC/PUCSP  -  1969-1970 

In  Universities s 

-  Chaired j  "Social  Problems  of  the  Audio -Communication  Handicapped": 

Courses  Education,  PUC  Sao  Paulo,  1974. 

-  Training  Course  Supervisor;  Courses  Education,  PUC  Sao  Paulo  1974 , 

-  Chaired i    Theories  of  Education  as  Applied  to  Communication 
Disorders,  Course?  Phono  audio  logy,  0X.TC  Sao  Paulo,  from  1973  to 
present* 

-  Chaired;  Theories  of  Educacao  as  Applied  to  Communication 
Disorders,  PUC  Campinas,  Course  s Phono audio logy,  1972  to  present. 

COURSES,  COHERENCES  and  LECTURES  GIVEN; 

-  Updating  course  for  Teachers  of  Special  Education  for  the 
Hearing  Impaired;  S.Paulo  State  Department  of  Education 
DEPJJIC/PUCSP  -  S.Paulo  1970 

-  Conference?  Pedagogical  Evaluation  of  Dysacustics 
Brazilian  Association  of  Infantile  Neuropsychiatry 
Sao  Paulo,  February  27,  1973^ 

-  Courses  Technology  as  Applied  to  Special  Education 
federal  Univers_cy  of  Eio  de  Janeiro 

January  1976 « 

-  Updating  Coarse  for  Teachers  of  the  Hearing  Impaired 
Eederal  University  of  Para  and  The  Para  State  Department  of 
Education,,   Discipline;   Special  Methodology  for  the  Hearing 
Impaired,  Belem,  February  1976. 

-  Training  Coarse  -  Implantation  of  Pilot  Project 
Implementation  of  Proposed  Curriculum  for  the  Hearing  Impaired 
The  National  Center  of  Special  Education/MEC  and  DEEDIC/PUC 

Sao  Paulo,  July  1976, 

-  The  Handicapped  Child  and  the  Specialist 
Extension,  Updating  and  Specialization  Service 
IUC  Sao  Paulo,  June  1976 . 

ELABORATION  AND  COORDINATION  OE  COURSES  AND  PROJECTS 

-  Coordinator  of  the  Updating  Course  for  the  Education  of  the 
Hearing  Impaired  -  CENESP/KEC  -  DEEDIC/lUCSP  -  Sao  Paulo, 
August  to  November  1974, 

-  Coordinator  of  the  Course  for  Updating  in  the  Education  of  the 
Hearing  Impaired  -  "EEESP/lvlEC  -  BEEDIC/PUCSP  -  Sao  Paulo, 
July  1975c 


Jo  so  G-eraldo  Silveira  Bueno  pg.3. 


of  the  Hearing  Impaired.  CEWESP/ta!C  -  DEEDIC/PUCSP,  Sao  Paulo, 
July/Sept ember  1975. 
.  Coordinator  for  the  Working  Tean  of  DERDIO/FUCSP 
Elaboration  of  the  Proposed  Curriculum  for  the  Hearing  Impaired 
(lrst.  through  8th  grades  of  elementary  school) 
National  Center  for  Special  Edueation/MEC  -  1975/76. 

■  Elaborator,  together  with  Prof.  Nadyr  da  Gloria  Haguiara 
Cervellini,  for  he  Training  of  Teachers  of  the  Handicapped  in 
Audio communication.  Courses  Pedagogy  PUCSP,  Sao  Paulo, 
September  1372. 

ICIENTIEIC  ACTIVITIES 


Research 

-  Methods  for  Teaching  the  Hearing  Impaired 
Pontifical  Catholic  University  of  Sao  Paulo 
(a  Theses  still  to  be  completed). 

PUBLICATIONS 

-"Vocational  Orientation  for  the  Hearing  Impaired,"  coll.  Alvair 
Pentoado  Cervellini,  Maria  Amalia  Azevedo  Goldberg  and  Maria 
Todescan  Bias  Batistas  "Education  Today"  n2  14,  March/April  74. 

li-An  Experience  in  Dramatization  in  a  Specialized  School  for  the 
Hearing  Impaired,"  coll.  Maria- Cristina  da  Cunha  Pereira  and 
Marthc  Eloiza  Carrara  M0denesc.  Atualizacao  em  Audiologia  e 
Foni atria,  n^  3. 

-  "An  Experience  in  the  Area  of  Physical  Education  in  Specialized 
School  for  the  Hearing  Impaired,"  Educac^ao  Pisica" ,  MEC,  n^  23. 


•**  *-x-*-  **- 


ICE  OF  THE  PRESIDENT 
hard  Kinney.  B  A.  LH  D 


THE   HADLEY  SCHOOL   FOR  THE   BLIND 


STREET,   WINNETKA,   ILLINOIS  60093,   U.S. A 
Phone:  312/446-8111 


THE  DEFINITION,  RESPONSIBILITIES  AND  RIGHTS  OF  DEAF-BLIND  PERSONS 

By  Dr.  Richard  Kinney,  President 
Hadley  School  for  the  Blind,  U.S.A. 

Delivered  at  the  First  Brazilian  Seminar  on  the  Education  of  the  Deaf-Blind 
Sao  Paulo,  Brazil 
November  7,  1977 


Colleagues  and  Friends: 

Brazil  is  a  great  nation.   Geographically,  it  is  the  largest  country  in 
the  Western  Hemisphere.   Socially,  it  is  thinking  large  thoughts  about 
the  welfare  of  ALL  its  citizens,  as  this  significant  seminar  proves.   I 
am  honored  and  happy  to  be  with  you. 

You  have  asked  me  to  speak  to  you  about  the  definition  of  deaf-blindness 
and  about  the  rights  and  responsibilities  of  people  who  are  deaf-blind. 
I  do  so  both  as  an  educator  who  is  Chairman  of  the  Committee  on  Services 
to  the  Deaf-Blind  of  the  World  Council  for  the  Welfare  of  the  Blind  and 
as  a  deaf-blind  person  myself.   If  this  twofold  viewpoint  gives  my  remarks 
added  perspective,  I  am  all  the  happier. 

As  an  educator,  I  recommend  to  your  consideration  the  definition  adopted 
last  September  in  New  York  City  by  the  First  Helen  Keller  World  Conference 
on  Services  to  Deaf-Blind  Youths  and  Adults.   The  definition  reads  that 
deaf-blind  individuals  are  "persons  who  have  substantial  visual  and  hearing 
losses  such  that  the  combination  of  the  two  causes  extreme  difficulty  in 
the  pursuit  of  educational,  vocational,  avocational  or  social  skills." 
The  key  word  in  the  definition  is  COMBINATION.   The  person  with  substantial 
visual  loss  can  still  hear  and  listen.   The  person  with  substantial  hearing 
loss  can  still  see  and  observe.   But  the  person  with  substantial  losses  of 
both  sight  and  hearing  experiences  a  combination  of  sensory  deprivation 
that  may  cause  extreme  difficulty  in  achieving  life's  most  vital  goals. 
Such  a  person  is  by  definition  deaf -blind. 

The  foregoing  definition  has  the  merit  of  being  functional  rather  than 
technical.   Few  things  could  be  more  heartbreaking  than  to  tell  a  person 
experiencing  severe  sight-hearing  loss  that  he  or  she  is  not  quite  blind 
enough  or  not  quite  deaf  enough  to  meet  some  technical  requirement  for 
help.   Life  is  more  important  than  any  technicality! 


SPONSORS 

'ttsvbufg    Pennsylvania 

Charlton  Heston 
Beverly  Hills.  California 

Mrs    Waller  A   Krafll 
Chicago.  Illinois 

Arthur  N    Magill 
National  Consultant 
Canadian  National  Instilutt 

tor  the  Blind 
Toronto.  Canada 

agents    Professor  o(  Ecor 
nversity  ol  Minnesota 

om, 

=' 

Andrew  McNally  III 

Rand  McNally  &  Company 

Deaf-blindness  in  its  extreme  form  means  simply  that  one  cannot  see, 
one  cannot  hear,  one  must  rely  wholly  and  utterly  on  the  sense  of 
touch  to  communicate  with  one's  fellow  human  beings.   This  is  precisely 
what  deaf-blindness  means  to  me  as  an  individual.   I  cannot  see  the 
brightest  light,  and  if  the  atomic  bomb  went  off  under  my  chair  this 
morning,  I  doubt  that  I  could  hear  it.   But  deaf-blindness  need  not  be 
total  to  present  severe  and  special  problems  requiring  wise  and  special 
solutions.   If  an  individual  has  substantial  visual  loss  and  substantial 
hearing  loss  and  the  combination  of  the  two  is  causing  extreme  difficulty 
in  achieving  an  education  or  in  securing  employment  or  in  enjoying 
recreation  or  in  gaining  social  participation,  then  that  individual 
is  deaf-blind.   That  individual  needs  our  help! 

As  to  the  rights  of  deaf-blind  persons,  the  Helen  Keller  World  Conference 
on  Services  to  Deaf-Blind  Youths  and  Adults  unanimously  adopted  a 
declaration  on  this  very  subject.   Let  me  read  it  to  you  now  and  comment 
on  each  article. 

Preamble  -  "Delegates  from  30  countries  around  the  world  assembled  for 
this  first  international  conference  on  services  to  deaf-blind  youths 
and  adults,  welcoming  the  United  Nations  Declaration  of  Human  Rights 
and  the  Declaration  of  the  Rights  of  Disabled  persons,  have  agreed 
upon  and  have  adopted  the  following  Declaration  specifically  concerning 
the  needs  and  rights  of  deaf-blind  persons  and  recommend  it  to  the 
attention  of  the  world  community:" 

Article  1  -  "Every  deaf-blind  person  is  entitled  to  enjoy  the  universal 
rights  that  are  guaranteed  to  all  people  by  the  United  Nations  Declaration 
of  Human  Rights  and  the  rights  provided  for  all  disabled  persons  by 
the  Declaration  on  the  Rights  of  Disabled  Persons." 

This  article  simply  states  that  deaf-blind  people  are  human  beings  with 
the  same  basic  rights  as  all  other  people,  including  all  other  disabled 
people.   Who  would  deny  it?   According  to  Dr.  Peter  Salmon,  a  noted 
U.S.  rehabilitation  expert  once  described  deaf-blind  people  as  "vegetables, 
I  don't  know  the  expert's  name,  but  I  trust  that  by  now  the  "vegetables" 
have  planted  him  six  feet  deep. 

Article  2  -  "Deaf-blind  persons  have  the  right  to  expect  that  their 
capabilities  and  their  aspirations  to  lead  a  normal  life  within  the 
community  and  their  ability  to  do  so  shall  be  recognized  and  respected 
by  all  governments,  administrators,  educational  and  rehabilitation 
personnel  and  the  general  public." 

This  article  states  that  deaf -blind  persons  are  not  only  human  beings, 
but  also  NORMAL  human  beings  who  wish  to  live  normal  lives  within  the 
community.   They  expect  the  community  to  recognize  both  their  desire  and 
their  capacity  to  do  so.   The  things  that  make  you  happy  or  sad,  make 
deaf -blind  people  happy  or  sad.   It  is  as  simple  as  that. 


Article  3  -  "Deaf-blind  persons  have  the  right  to  receive  the  best 
possible  medical  treatment  and  care  for  the  restoration  of  sight  and 
hearing  and  the  services  required  to  utilize  remaining  sight  and 
hearing,  including  the  provision  of  the  most  effective  optical  and 
hearing  aids,  speech  training,  when  appropriate,  and  other  forms  of 
rehabilitation  intended. to  secure  maximum  independence." 

This  article  refers  to  our  earlier  point  that  deaf-blindness  need  not 

be  total.   In  fact,  every  bit  of  residual  sight  and  hearing  should 

be  utilized  and  enhanced,  both  through  remedial  medicine  and  modern 

technology.   Since  communication  is  a  two-way  exchange,  any  training 

that  can  advance  a  deaf-blind  person's  ability  to  speak  will  be  tremendously 

helpful.   Please  note  that  the  goal  sought  is  to  increase  the  deaf-blind 

person's  INDEPENDENCE. 

Article  4  -  "Deaf-blind  persons  have  the  right  to  economic  security 
to  ensure  a  satisfactory  standard  of  living  and  the  right  to  secure 
work  commensurate  with  their  capabilities  and  abilities  or  to  engage 
in  other  meaningful  tasks,  for  which  the  requisite  education  and 
training  shall  be  provided." 

This  article  could  be  summarized  as  the  right  to  be  useful  -  the  right 
to  work,  to  contribute,  to  feel  one  is  giving  to  others  as  well  as 
receiving  from  others.   I  have  noted  that  every  time  a  deaf -blind  man 
or  woman  gains  a  paying  job,  he  or  she  gains  new  respect.   Money  is 
a  great  equalizer!   The  surest  passport  to  independence  is  an  adequately 
filled  pocketbook. 

Article  5  -  "Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right  to  lead  an  independent 
life  as  an  integrated  member  of  the  family  and  community,  including  the 
right  to  live  on  their  own  or  to  marry  and  raise  a  family.   Where  a 
deaf-blind  person  lives  within  a  family,  greatest  possible  support  shall 
be  provided  to  the  whole  family  unit  by  the  appropriate  authorities. 
If  institutional  care  is  advisable,  it  shall  be  provided  in  surrounding 
and  under  such  conditions  that  it  resembles  normal  life  as  closely  as 
possible." 

Note  that  this  article  not  only  asserts  the  deaf-blind  person's  right  to 

be  part  of  a  family  or  of  a  family  environment,  but  also  the  right  to 

live  alone  or  to  be  head  of  a  family.   Individual  desires  and  circumstances 

will  vary,  but  the  right  is  inherent.   I  have  known  deaf-blind  persons 

who  live  happily  with  their  parents,  deaf-blind  persons  who  are  themselves 

successful,  parents,  deaf-blind  persons  who  live  independently  in  their  own 

apartment  and  others  who  prefer  the  security  and  comfort  of  a  well-run 

institutional  home.   I  myself  lived  alone  in  my  own  bachelor  apartment  for 

5  years  as  a  young  man,  later  marrying  a  blind  woman  with  normal  hearing 

and  being  now  the  proud  father  of  an  athletic   14-year-old  son  Who  specializes 

in  golf,  baseball,  and  all  forms  of  pictorial  art.   The  right  to  a  family 

life  is  as  old  as  Adam  and  Eve. 


Article  6  -  "Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right,  and  at  no  cost, 
to  the  services  of  an  interpreter  -with  whom  they  can  communicate 
effectively  to  maintain  contact  with  others  and  with  the  environment." 

This  article  emphasizes  the  vital  importance  to  a  deaf-blind  person  of 
interpreter  services  as  a  communication  link  with  the  community.   The 
words  "cost-free"  have  caused  some  controversy,  but  it  was  the  thought 
of  the  conference  that  many  deaf -blind  persons,  especially  children  or 
the  elderly,  simply  will  not  have  personal  funds  with  which  to  employ 
interpreters.   Whether  the  answer  lies  in  volunteer  interpreters, 
interpreters  supplied  by  private  social  agencies,  government-employed 
interpreters  or  a  combination  of  all  three  will  probably  depend  on  the 
philosophy  and  culture  of  each  individual  nation.   But  the  right  to 
communicate  is  perhaps  the  greatest  single  right  for  which  a  deaf-blind 
person  longs.   The  human  mind  will  break  through  any  barrier  to  reach 
other  human  minds. 

Article  7  -  "Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right  to  current  news, 
information,  reading  matter  and  educational  material  in  a  medium  and 
form  which  they  can  assimilate.   Technical  devices  that  could  serve  to 
this  end  shall  be  provided  and  research  in  this  area  shall  be  encouraged." 

This  article  extends  and  reemphasizes  the  right  of  the  deaf-blind  person 
to  information  and  knowledge  about  the  world  in  which  he  lives.   After 
all,  the  physical  senses  are  merely  channels  through  which  the  mind 
observes  and  communicates  with  the  community  and  the  environment.   What 
really  matters  is  the  mind  behind  the  senses.   To  KNOW  is  more  important 
than  to  see;  to  UNDERSTAND  is  more  important  than  to  hear. 

Article  8  -  "Deaf -blind  persons  shall  have  the  right  to  engag,e  in  leisure 
time  recreational  activities,  which  shall  be  provided  for  their  benefit, 
and  the  right  and  opportunity  to  organize  their  own  clubs  or  associations 
for  self-improvement  and  social  betterment." 

This  article  draws  attention  to  the  fact  that  life  is  not  all  work  and 
earnest  endeavor,  but  should  also  contain  a  vital  element  of  recreation 
and  enjoyment.   Having  much  in  common,  many  deaf -blind  people  take  pleasure 
in  sharing  activities  with  other  deaf -blind  persons.   Mutual  life  enhancement 
is  one  of  the  great  foundation  stones  of  civilization. 

Article  9  -  "Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right  to  be  consulted  on  all 
matters  of  direct  concern  to  them  and  to  legal  advice  and  protection  against 
improper  abridgement  of  their  rights  due  to  their  disabilities." 

Again  and  again  deaf-blind  people  have  cried  out  for  a  larger  part  in  shaping 
their  own  destinies.   The  right  to  make  one's  own  decisions  is  the  basis 
of  freedom.   Like  all  other  people,  deaf -blind  persons  need  options 
from  which  to  choose,  choices  from  which  to  select.   Only  by  exercising 
his  or  her  judgement  can  a  deaf -blind  person  function  as  a  fully  equal 
citizen  in  the  community. 


The  enumerated  rights  of  deaf-blind  persons  will  not  be  achieved 
in  a  day  or  a  year  or  any  specific  time.   Some  may  call  the  foregoing 
articles  idealistic  dreams.   Yet  the  world  is  built  on  dreams  - 
dreams  that  have  come  true  or  are  in  the  process  of  coming  true. 
Most  beautiful  of  all,  dreams  imply  responsibility. 

The  deaf -blind  person  who  demands  knowledge  and  training  as  a  right 
also  accepts  the  responsibility  to  develop  his  own  potential  for  the 
benefit  of  the  community. 

The  deaf-blind  person  who  insists  on  respect  and  independence  as  a 
right  also  affirms  responsibility  for  his  own  actions  and  respect  for 
the  rights  of  others. 

Handicapped  or  unhandicapped,  we  are  all  human  beings  living  on  one 
planet  and  sharing  one  destiny.   What  does  life  require  of  us  but  to 
do  our  best  for  ourselves  and  for  each  other? 


I  seminArio  brasileiro  de  educaqao  de  deficiente  audiovisual 


A  DECLARATION  of  rights  of 

DEAF-BLIND  PERSONS 


I  SEDAV  -  ABEDEV 


HELEN    KELLER 

WORLD  CONFERENCE  ON  SERVICES  TO  DEAF-BLIND  YOUTHS  AND  ADUL 

Conference  Tin  me:  "The  Deaf-Blind  Person  in  the  Community" 

11-16     SEPTEMBER      1977 

DR.  RICHARD  KINNEY,  Conference  Chairman  and  Chairman 
of  WCWB's  Committee  on  Services  to  the  Deaf-Blind 

700  Elm  Street,  Winnetka,  Illinois  60093  United  States 
Tel:  (312)446-8111 


A  DECLARATION  OF  RIGHTS  OF  DEAF-BLIND  PERSONS 

adopted  by  the 

Helen  Keller  World  Conference  on  Services  to  Deaf-Blind  Youths  and  Adults, 
sponsored  by  the  Committee  on  Services  to  the  Deaf-Blind  of  the  World  Council 
for  the  Welfare  of  the  Blind;  September  16,  1977,  New  York  City,  U.S.A. 


PREAMBLE 

Delegates  from  30  countries  around  the  world  assembled  for  this  first  international 
conference  on  services  to  deaf-blind  youths  and  adults,  welcoming  the  United  Nations 
Declaration  of  Human  Rights  and  the  Declaration  of  the  Rights  of  Disabled  Persons, 
have  agreed  upon  and  have  adopted  the  following  Declaration  specifically  concerning 
the  needs  and  rights  of  deaf-blind  persons  and  commend  it  to  the  attention  of  the 
world  community: 

ARTICLE  1 

Every  deaf-blind  person  is  entitled  to  enjoy  the  universal  rights  that  are 
guaranteed  to  all  people  by  the  United  Nations  Declaration  of  Human  Rights  and 
the  rights  provided  for  all  disabled  persons  by  the  Declaration  on  the  Rights 
of  Disabled  Persons. 


ARTICLE  2 

Deaf-blind  persons  have  the  right  to  expect  that  their  capabilities  and. their 


uear-Diina  persons  nave  tne  rignt  to  expect  tnat  tneir  capabilities  and.tneir 
aspirations  to  lead  a  normal  life  within  the  community  and  their  ability  to  do 
so  shall  be  recognized  and  respected  by  all  governments,  administrators,  educat 
and  rehabilitation  personnel  and  the  general  public. 


ional 


ARTICLE  3 

Deaf-blind  persons  have  the  right  to  receive  the  best  possible  medical  treatment 
and  care  for  the  restoration  of  sight  and  hearing  and  the  services  required  to 
utilize  remaining  sight  and  hearing,  including  the  provision  of  the  most  effective 
optical  and  hearing  aids,  speech  training,  when  appropriate,  and  other  forms  of 
rehabilitation  intended  to  secure  maximum  independence. 


ARTICLE  4 

Deaf-blind  persons  have  the  right  to  economic  security  to  ensure  a  satisfactory- 
standard  of  living  and  the  right  to  secure  work  commensurate  with  their  capabilities 
and  abilities  or  to  engage  in  other  meaningful  tasks,  for  which  the  requisite 
education  and  training  shall  be  provided. 

ARTICLE  5 

Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right  to  lead  an  independent  life  as  an 
integrated  member  of  the  family  and  community,  including  the  right  to  live  on 
their  own  or  to  marry  and  raise  a  family.   Where  a  deaf-blind  person  lives  within 
a  family,  greatest  possible  support  shall  be  provided  to  the  whole  "family  unit  by 
the  appropriate  authorities.   If  institutional  care  is  advisable,  it  shall  be 
provided  in  surrounding  and  under  such  conditions  that  it  resembles  normal  life 
as  closely  as  possible. 

ARTICLE  6 

Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right,  and  at  no  cost,  to  the  services  of  an 
interpreter  with  whom  they  can  communicate  effectively  to  maintain  contact  with 
others  and  with  the  environment. 


ARTICLE  7 

Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right  to  current  news,  information,  reading 
matter  and  educational  material  in  a  medium  and  form  which  they  can  assimilate. 
Technical  devices  that  could  serve  to  this  end  shall  be  provided  and  research 
in  this  area  shall  be  encouraged. 


ARTICLE 


Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right  to  engage  in  leisure  time  recreational 
activities,  which  shall  be  provided  for  their  benefit,  and  the  right  and' opportunity 
to  organize  their  own  clubs  or  associations  for  self- improvement  and  social  betterment. 

ARTICLE  9 

Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right  to  be  consulted  on  all  matters  of  direct 
concern  to  them  and  to  legal  advice  and  protection  against  improper  abridgement 
of  their  rights  due  to  their  disabilities. 


For  purposes  of  implementation  of  the  DECLARATION  OF  RIGHTS  OF  DEAF-BLIND 
PERSONS,  the  definition  of  deaf-blind  persons  adopted  by  the  Helen  Keller 
World  Conference  on  Services  to  Deaf-Blind  Youths  and  Adults  is  as  follows 

"Persons  who  have  substantial  visual  and  hearing  losses 
such  that  the  combination  of  the  two  causes  extreme 
difficulty  in  pursuit  of  educational,  vocational,  avo- 
cational,  or  social  skills". 


BIO-DATA 


RICHARD  KINNEY,  PRESIDENT 


THE  HADLEY  SCHOOL  FOR  THE   BLIND 


700  ELM  STREET,  WINNETKA,  ILLINOIS  60093,  U. 
Phone:  312/446-8111 
Dr.  Richard  Kinney — Educator,  Lecturer,  Poet 

Blind  since  age  7,  deaf  since  age  20 

Born:   June  21,  1923    East  Sparta,  Ohio  U.S.A. 


Degrees:   B.A.,  Summa  cum  laude,  Mount  Union  College,  Alliance,  Ohio  -  1954 
L.H.D.,  Mount  Union  College,  Alliance,  Ohio  -  1966 
L.H.D.,  Loyola  University,  Chicago,  Illinois  -  1977 
Author  of:   INDEPENDENT  LIVING  WITHOUT  SIGHT  AND  HEARING  (textbook) 

FLIGHT  OF  ARROWS  (poetry)     FLUTES  BEYOUNG  THE  DAY  (poetry) 

ENCORE  (poetry)         HARP  OF  SILENCE   (poetry) 

Articles,  essays,   short  stories,  poems  and  humor  in  various  periodicals, 

including  the  New  Outlook  for  the»Blind,  The  Rehabilitation  teacher, 

The  Reader's  Digest,  Epos,  etc.,  Blindness:  1968 

Relevant  Braille  (course  text) 


Speaking  Experience : 

Radio,  TV,  and  platform  in  35  countries;  guest  lecturer  at  Harvard, 
University  of  Chile,  National  University  of  Paraguay,  University  of  Riyadh 
luncheon  or  dinner  talks — estimated  at  1,500. 

Awards:      Citation  of  "Meritorious  Service  to  Literature" 
Midland  Author's  Society 

Helen  Keller  GOLD  MEDAL  for  Literary  Excellence 
Anne  Sullivan  GOLD  MEDAL 
Dialogue:   Public  Service  Award,  1969 
Illinois  Handicapped  Citizen  of  the  Year,  1970 
Lions  Ambassador  of  Goodwill,  1971 

Member:      Pi  Gamma  Mu,  Social  Science  Honor  Society 
Sigma  Alpha  Episilon  Fraternity 
Advisory  Committee  for  the/\Center  for  Deaf-Blind  Youths  and  Adults 

Department  of  Health,  Education  and  Welfare,  Washington,  D.  C. 
American  Association  of  Workers  for  the  Blind,  Member,  Board  of  Directors 
Winnetka  Lions  Club 
Chairman  of  the  Advisory  Committee  on  Services  for  the  Deaf-Blind  of  the 

World  Council  for  the  Welfare  of  the  Blind 
North  Shore  Chess  Club 
International  Platform  Association 


Family 


Widower  with  a  14 -year-old  son,  Clark 


Listed  in:   Who's  Who  in  America   Directory 
Who ' s  Who  in  the  World 
Sigma  Alpha  Epsilon  Directory 
Dictionary  of  International  Biography 

Recent  Activities: 

Chairman,  World  Conference  for  Deaf-Blind  Youths  and  Adults,  September,  1977 


>na«j  Bernstein 

George  Bush 

Mam-o  Doud  Eisenhower 

Get tsy  burg    Pennsylvania 

Hor  Serene  H.ghness 

Edwin  B    Duophy.  M  D 

*d  Bntta.n  HI 

Ophthalmology  CNnic 

Harvard  Unrven.ly 

nkeri  Trull  Company 

Regents    Professor  of  Economics 

Arthur  N   Magill 

George  Shearing 

National  Consultant 

North  Hollywood.  Calilorn 

Canadian  National  Institute 

lot  the  Blind 

American  Ma. re 

Andrew  McNally  III 

Rand  McNally  A  Company 

I  seminArio  brasileiro  de  educaqao  de  deficiente  audiovisual 


DEFINITIONS,  RESPONSABILITIES  AND 

RIGHTS  OF  THE  DEAF-BLIND  (THE 

HISTORY  OF  THE  EDUCATIONS  OF 

DEAF  -  BLIND  OF  ALL  THE  WORLD) 


EDWARD  J   WATERHOUSE 


SEDAV  -  ABEDEV 


Definitions,  Responsibilities  and  Rights  of  the  Deaf-Blind 
(The  History  of  the  Education  of  Deaf-Blind  of  all  the  World) 

Paper  presented  at  First  Brazilian  Seminar  for  the  Education  of  the  Deaf-Blind 
Sao  Paulo,  November  1977. 

Edward  J.  Waterhouse,  Director  (Retired),  Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 

Watertown,  Massachusetts 
USA 


Definitions.   Who  are  the  deaf-blind?   In  a  world  which  has  no  universally- 
accepted  definition  of  blindness  or  of  deafness,  it  is  not  surprising  that  there 
are  more  than  one  definitions  of  deaf -bl indness  in  use  in  various  countries, 
and  even  within  the  same  country . 

These  definitions  fall  into  two  groups.   In  the  first  the  prevailing 
definitions  of  blindness  and  deafness  are  combined.   In  the  second  group  the 
fact  is  recognized  that  even  slight  losses  of  hearing  or  of  vision,  which  when 
alone,  would  not  have  been  a  serious  problem,  can,  when  combined,  lead  to 
problems  of  communication  so  severe  that  special  programs  for  education  and 
rehabilitation  are  needed  to  enable  the  handicapped  person  to  develop  his 
capabilities  and  take  a  self-respecting  place  in  society. 

At  the  Helen  Keller  World  Conference  on  Services  to  Deaf-Blind  Youths  and 
Adults,  sponsored  by  the  Committee  on  Services  to  the  Deaf-Blind  of  the  World 
Council  for  the  Welfare  of  the  Blind,  held  in  New  York  City  in  September  1977, 
and  attended  by  delegates  from  about  30  countries,  many  of  whom  were  themselves 
deaf-blind,  the  following  definition  was  unanimously  adopted.  "Deaf-Blind 
individuals  should  be  defined  as  persons  having  such  substantial  visual  and 
hearing  losses  that  the  combined  impairments  cause  extreme  difficulty  in  the 
pursuit  of  educational,  vocational  and  avocationn]  goals." 


Clearly  this  definition  covers  many  people  who  are  not  generally  considered 
to  be  deaf-blind.   In  countries  where  presently  those  persons  who  have  only  light 
perception  or  less  are  considered  blind,  and  where  definitions  of  deafness  are 
equally  stringent,  this  all-embracing  definition  may  have  to  wait  a  long  time 
before  acceptance.   In  the  United  States,  however,  a  definition  based  on  this 
concept  was  adopted  by  the  U.  S.  Department  of  Education  almost  10  years  ago. 
In  the  United  Kingdom  and  parts  of  Western  Europe  as  well  as  in  Australia  and 
Japan  similar  definitions  are  in  use.   These  cover  the  majority  of  deaf-blind 
people  in  the  world  who  are  being  served  in  some  way  or  another. 

As  research  is  carried  out  in  both  America  and  Europe  into  the  problems  of 
deaf-blind  children  and  adults,  the  severe  effects  of  the  accumulation  of  visual 
and   auditory  defects  become  clearer,  and  the  wisdom  of  this  type  of  definition 
becomes  more  evident. 

Under  this  broad  definition,  the  variety  of  persons  covered  is  great.   There 
are  relatively  few  who  suffer  total  blindness  and  total  deafness,  and  of  these 
only  a  small  fraction  have  been  without  sight  and  hearing  since  birth.   A  larger 
number,  like  Helen  Keller,  were  normal  at  least  until  late  infancy,  and  frequently 
for  years  longer. 

The  victims  of  maternal  rubella,  who  in  the  United  States  and  the  United 
Kingdom  at  present  make  up  the  majority  of  deaf-blind  children,  generally  have 
some  degree  of  both  residual  sight  and  hearing,  though  both  losses,  existed  at 
birth  . 


The  other  major  cause  of  deaf-blindness,  Usher's  Syndrome,  while  congenital, 
causes  early  deafness  but  the  loss  of  vision  is  usually  delayed  until  early 
adulthood . 

Since  this  conference  deals  with  education  rather  than  rehabilitation,  a 
large  group  of  deaf-blind  persons,  who  in  some  countries  constitute  the  majority, 
need  not  be  discussed,  but  should  not  be  overlooked.   These  are  the  elderly  blind 
who  go  deaf  and  the  aging  deaf  who  lose  their  sight  and  also  the  older  men  and 
women  who  lost  both  sight  and  hearing.   And,  of  course,  all  deaf-blind  people 
eventually  grow  old. 

So  we  find  victims  who  lost  their  hearing  before  acquiring  language  and 
speech  require  very  different  treatment  than  those  whose  hearing  loss  came 
later  in  life.   And,  of  course,  the  degree  of  loss  makes  a  tremendous 
difference  in  how  a  person  can  function  and  the  services  he  will  require. 

Responsibilities  and  Rights 

It  is  indeed  most  fortunate  for  me  that  shortly  before  preparing  this  pape 
I  was  able  to  attend  the  Helen  Keller  World  Conference  referred  to  above.   Hert 
I  listened  to  a  number  of  intelligent  and  well-educated  deaf-blind  men  and  women 
speak  about  what  they  need  from  society,  and  what  they  in  turn  should  be  expected 
to  give.   I  make  no  apology  for  reading  to  you  today,  in  full,  "A  Declaration  of 
Rights  of  Deaf -Blind  Persons"  which  the  Conference  adopted  unanimously.   The 
committee  responsible  for  this  ringing  challenge  to  society,  and  the  delegates 
who  gave  it  their  approval,  both  included  deaf-blind  persons.   For  the  first  time 
in  history,  I  believe,  the  deaf-blind  spoke  for  themselves. 


Article  1 

Every  deaf-blind  person  is  entitled  to  enjoy  the  universal  rights  that  are 
guaranteed  to  all  people  by  the  United  Nations  Declaration  on  the  Rights  of 
Disabled  Persons. 

Article  2 

Deaf-Blind  persons  have  the  right  to  expect  that  their  capabilities  and 
their  aspirations  to  lead  a  normal  life  within  the  community  and  their  ability 
to  do  so  shall  be  recognized  and  respected  by  all  governments,  administrators, 
rehabilitation  personnel  and  the  general  public. 

Article  3 

Deaf-Blind  persons  have  the  right  to  receive  the  best  possible  medical 
treatment  and  care  for  the  restoration  of  sight  and  hearing  and  the  services 
required  to  utilize  remaining  sight  and  hearing,  including  the  provision  of 
the  most  effective  optical  and  hearing  aids,  speech  training,  when  appropriate, 
and  other  forms  of  rehabilitation  intended  to  secure  maximum  independence. 

) 

Article  4 

Deaf-blind  persons  have  the  right  to  economic  security  to  ensure  a  satisfactory 
standard  of  living  and  the  right  to  secure  work  commensurate  with  their 
capabilities  and  abilities  or  to  engage  in  other  meaningful  tasks,  for  which 
the  requisite  education  and  training  shall  be  provided. 


Article  5 

Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right  to  lead  an  independent  life  as  an 
integrated  member  of  the  family  and  community,  including  t;he  right  to  live  on 
their  own  or  to  marry  and  raise  a  family.  Where  a  deaf -blind  person  lives 
within  a  family,  greatest  possible  support  shall  be  provided  to  the  whole 
family  unit  by  appropriate  authorities.   If  institutional  care  is  advisable, 
it  shall  be  provided  in  a  surrounding  and  under  such  conditions  that  it 
resembles  normal  life  as  closely  as  possible. 

Article  6 

Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right,  and  at  no  cost,  to  the  services 
of  interpreters  with  whom  they  can  communicate  effectively  to  maintain 
contact  with  others  and  with  the  community. 

Article  7 

Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right  to  current  news,  information, 
reading  matter  and  educational  material  in  a  medium  and  form  which  they  can 
assimilate.   Technical  devices  that  could  serve  to  this  end  shall  be  provided 
and  research  in  this  area  shall  be  encouraged. 

Article  8 


Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right  to  engage  in  leisure  time 
recreational  activities,  which  shall  be  provided  for  their  benefit,  and  the 
right  and  opportunity  to  organize  their  own  clubs  or  associations  for  self- 
improvement  and  social  betterment. 


Article  9 

Deaf-blind  persons  shall  have  the  right  to  be  consulted  on  all  matters 
of  direct  concern  to  them  and  to  legal  advice  and  protection  against  improper 
abridgement  of  their  rights  due  to  their  disabilities. 

In  this  Declaration  of  Rights,  are  not  the  deaf-blind  saying  to  us  in  effect 

"We  too  possess  certain  'inalienable  Rights,  that  among  these  are  the 

Pursuit  of  Happiness',"  as  declared  in  the  historic  American  Declaration  of 
Independence  . 

To  summarize,  the  deaf-bl,ind  said  "Give  us  the  training,  the  tools,  and 
human  companionship,  and  we  will  be  normal  members  of  society."   May  I  stress 
"human  companionship".   Time  and  again  in  the  conference  the  deaf-blind  called 
"loneliness"  their  greatest  burden.   This  follows  Helen  Keller's  own  statement 
that  "The  deaf-blind  are  the  loneliest  people  on  earth".   I  would  like  to  stress 
this  point,  for  it  is  so  easily  overlooked,  and  yet  it  requires  no  professional 
training  or  expensive  equipment  to  befriend  a  deaf-blind  child  or  adult. 
Fortunately,  the  manual  alphabet  is  being  learned  today  by  countless  hearing 
people  as  its  significance  is  brought  to  public  attention.   Some  of  our 
national  television  newscasts  and  many  other  programs  in  the  United  States 
include  an  interpreter  for  the  deaf.   While  this  cannot  help  the  deaf-blind 
directly  it  serves  to  educate  the  public  to  the  value  of  this  special  means 
of  communication. 


The  deaf-blind  people  in  New  York  were  deeply  conscious  of  the  fact  that 
they  cannot  succeed  in  life  on  their  own.   They  recognized  that  they  would  be 
dependent  on  others  all  their  lives.   They  realized  what  a  challenge  this  is 
to  their  self-respect.   They  were  aware  that  their  debt  to  society  could  not 
be  repaid  in  full  and  they  acknowledged  their  responsibility  to  respond  to 
the  fullest  degree  possible  by  performing  their  jobs  with  efficiency,  and 
responding  to  help  given  with  courtesy  and  good  will.   Unless  society  accepts 
the  principle  that  handicapped  persons  have  certain  inalienable  rights  which 
the  more  fortunate  people  of  the  world  are  x^illing  to  guarantee,  the 
deaf-blind  will  forever  be  second  class  citizens. 

H  j  story 

Time  permits  only  a  brief  account  of  the  history  of  the  Education  of  the 
Deaf-Blind  of  all  the  World. 

As  is  well-known,  the  first  deaf-blind  child  to  be  successfully  educated 
was  Laura  Bridgman  who  entered  Perkins  in  1837.   Even  more  famous  is  the 
remarkable  teacher-pupil  experience  of  Anne  Sullivan,  a  Perkins  graduate, 
and  Helen  Keller  who  studied  at  the  school  for  several  years. 

It  seems  that  there  are  today  more  deaf-blind  children  being  educated  in 
the  United  States  than  in  the  rest  of  the  world  combined.   This,  of  course, 
is  partly  the  result  of  the  massive  rubella  epidemics  of  1964  -  65.   There 
are  over  2,000  receiving  educational  services  of  one  kind  or  another  in  the 
United  States  . 


Europe 

According  to  Dr.  Jeanne  R.  Kenmore  (Reference  I)  programs  for  educating 
deaf-blind  children  were  begun  in  France  (1860),  Sweden  (1882),  Germany  (1887) 
and  Finland  (1889).   In  each  case  the  number  of  pupils  was  small.   In  1977  only 
350  children  were  reported  as  being  educated  in  13  countries  as  follows: 


Great  Britain 

101 

German  Federal  Republic 

53 

U.S.S.R. 

51 

Italy 

26 

Netherlands 

25 

France 

25 

Switzerland 

18 

Sweden 

14 

Denmark 

11 

German  Democratic  Republic 

9 

Norway 

7 

Spain 

6 

Finland 

A 

Inte^ra^ao-Socio  Professional 


Outside  Europe  there  are  no  published  figures,  but  Australia  and  Japan  both 
have  extensive  programs.   Programs  also  exist  in  Canada,  New  Zealand,  Taiwan, 
Jamaica,  Iceland,  Israel  and  the  Republic  of  South  Africa.   A  small  group  is 
being  taught  in  Bombay.   A  start  has  been  made  in  Ibadan,  Nigeria  and  plans 
are  afoot  in  Kenya.   You  are  well  aware  yourselves  of  the  work  in  Argentina 
and  Brazil.   There  are  probably  other  programs  unknown  to  me. 

Generally  speaking,  outside  of  a  few  countries,  the  education  of  the 
deaf -blind  is  anywhere  from  fifty  to  a  hundred  years  behind  services  for 
blind  children. 

In  many  countries  of  Africa,  Asia  and  South  America,  the  existence  of 
deaf-blind  children  is  denied  by  authorities  though  statistically  this 
seems  unbelievable.   However,  some  small  progress  is  being  made.  When  next 
you  meet,  which  I  hope  will  be  in  a  few  short  years,  someone  may  be  able  to 
report  great  advances. 


I  thank  you  for  your  kind  attention 


REFERENCES 


Jeanne  R.  Kenmore  and  others,  in  STATE  OF  THE  ART: 
Perspectives  on  Serving  Deaf-Blind  Children  -  1977. 
338  pp. 

Southwestern  Regional  Deaf-Blind  Center, 

Office  of  Special  Education, 

<  aliforn*ia  State  Department  of  Education, 

771  Capitol  Mall 

Sacramento,  California   95814 

DEAF-BLIND  BIBLIOGRAPHY.   1977  edition.   186  pp. 

Perkins  School  for  the  Blind, 
175  North  Beacon  Street, 
Watertown,  Massachusetts  02172 

Proceedings  of  Helen  Keller  World  Conference  on  Services 
to  Deaf-Blind  Youths  and  Adults.   September  1977. 

To  be  published  early  in  1978  by  the  Hadley  School  for 
the  Blind,  300  Elm  Street,  Winnetka,  Illinois  60093. 


BIOGRAPHICAL  DATA  -  EDWARD  J.  WATERHOUSE  (DIRFCTOR,  RETIRED)   , 
PERKINS  SCHOOL  FOR  THE  BLIND 


Born  in  England,  1902.   Graduated  from  Queens   College.  Cambridge  University 
in  1930.   Emigrated  to  America  in  that  year.   Joined  the  staff  of  Perkins  School 
for  the  Blind  in  1933  and,  except  for  a  leave  of  absence  during  the  war  years, 
remained  on  the  staff  until  1977.   Appointed  Manager  of  the  Howe  Press  1946 
and  fifth  Director  of  Perkins  1951.   Resigned  the  Directorship  in  August  1971. 
Consultant  to  the  sixth  Director  September  1971  -  June  1977.   Was  awarded 
Honorary  Litt .  D.  Degree  by  Gallaudet  College,  Washington,  D.C.  in  1957. 

International  ("o  unci  I  for  the  Education  of  the  Visually  Handicapped  - 
Secretary,  1952-62,  Chairman,  1962-67.   Secretary  of  Conferences  in  the 
Netherlands  1952.  Norway  1957,  West  Germany  1962  and  Chairman  of  Conference 
at  Perkins  in  1967.   Chairman  of  subcommittee  on  the  deaf-blind  1964  to  1974, 
member  1962  to  present. 

World  ; ouncil  for  the  Welfare  of  the  Blind  -  Participated  in  conferences 
at  Paris  1954,  Rome  1959,  New  York  City  1964,  New  Delhi  1969,  and  Sao  Paulo, 
Brazil  1974.   Member  of  WCWB  Deaf-Blind  Committee  1969  to  the  present. 

Awarded  the  Migel  Medal  for  Outstanding  Service  to  the  Blind  by  the  American 
Foundation  for  the  Blind  1966. 

Publications  -  Editor  of  the  Perkins  "Lantern"  since  1952-1971.   Contributor 
of  numerous  articles  to  professional  journals  on  the  education  of  the  blind  and 
deaf-blind  both  in  the  United  States  and  in  other  countries. 

Married  the  former  Sina  Fladeland  in  1934,  has  one  daughter,  Mrs.  Elizabeth 
McCurdy  of  Bath,  Maine,  and  two  grandsons. 


< 


ACTIVITIES  OF  THE  BRAZILIAN  ASSOCIATION  FOR  TtiE  EDUCATION  OF  THE 
VISUALLY  HANDICAPPED  IN  BRAZIL 


GERA1.DO  SANDOVAL  DE  ANDRADE 
PRESIDENT  OF  ABEDEV 


1.  HISTORY 

1.1.  important  precedents 

1.2.  Creation  of  the  entity 
l.j.  First  Board  of  Directors 

1.4.  Activity  plans  of  uhe  present  Board. 

2 .  PROGRAMMING 

2.1.  Creation  of  Delegations 

2.2.  Creation  of  the  Louis  Braille  Museum 

2.3.  Organization  and  up-dating  of  members '  personal  history 

2.4.  1st  Brazilian  Encounter  of  Tecnnicians  on  Orientation 
and  Mobility   -  IV  ENBRATOM 

2.5.  Sociological  Research  (AtsEDEV/Rondon  Project) 

2.6.  Course-Seminar 

2.7.  19  SEDAV  (ist  Brazilian  Seminar  on  the  Education  of 
Audio-Visual  Handicapped 

2.«.  Other  plans. 


CURRICULUM  VITAE  -  Resume 
Geraldo  Sandoval  de  Andrade 


R.  Prof.  Carlo c  Rath, 

n°  198 
05462  Sao  Paulo  -  SP 
Rone;  211-1986. 


Present  Occupations  Head  of  the  SEMI  Service  of  Industrial 
Training  for  the  Visually  Handicapped. 


DUC A.TI0NAL  BACKGRAOUKD 


i,  Primary  School  -  Ginasio  Chanpagnat  (Marianist  Order)  , 

Franca,  State  of  Sao  Paulo 

Observations  Total  loss  of  vision  due  to  a  hunting  accident 
during  school  vacation.  January  1938. 
1938/1940  The  search  for  recuperation  of  sight  at 
0 phthalmo lo gi c al  c linic  s . 

2.  Secondary  School  -  Official  Institute  for  the  Blind  "Sao  Rafael", 
Bolo  Horizonte,  Minas  G-erais.  1941-1947 

3.  Teacher  College ,    Institute  of  Education  "Fernao  Bias" ,  Sao  Paulo, 
SP.  1956-1958. 

4.  Course  in  Psychology,  School  of  PJri^osophy,  Sciences  and  Letters, 
University  of  Sao  Paulo.  1965. 

5.  Various  Training  and  Specialization  Courses  % 
~  Psychological  Counseling,  SHNAIa 

-  Clinical  Psychology,  Foundation  for  the  Book  of  the  Blind  in 
)     Brasil. 

-  Work  Psychology,  Federation  of  the  Industries  of  the  State  of 
Sao  Paulo. 

G0   Training  at  the  Patronato  de  Cegos,  Buenos  Aires,  Argentina 

January  1952 
7.  On  September,  October  and  November  1969  observer  at; 

-  American  Foundation  for  Overseas  Blind  -  N.Y. 

-  The  Industrial  Hone  for  the  Blind  Rehabilitation  Center  -  N.Y. 

-  The  Hew  York  Association  for  the  Blind,  The  Light  House  -  N.Y. 


-  Blind  Industries  of  California  Inc. 


jos  Angeles,  Cal, 


India  Blind  Relief  Association,  New  Delhi,  India. 
Virganand  National  for  Blind  Girls,  New  Delhi,  India, 
Unione  Italians  dei  Ciechi  -  Roma,  Italy. 


G-eraldo  Sandoval  de  Andrade  -  2  - 

-  Insti turbo  Statale  di  Instruzione  per  gli  Educatori  dei  Ciechi, 

Rona,  Italy 

-  L' Union  dcs  Aveugles  de  G-uerre,  Paris,  "France, 

-  If1  Ami  tie  des  Aveugles  de  Prance,  Pari  a ,  Prance. 

-  Association  Valentin  Hauy  -  Paris,  Prance, 

Professional  Occupations  and  Activities g 

I  began  at  the  Foundation  for  the  Book  of  ~che  Blind  in  Brazil  as  a 
teacher  in  the  hone  of  the  handicapped  and  from  there  "began  to  guide 
the  initiation  of  researchs  for  a  market  for  work  for  the  visually 
handicapped  in  the  State  of  Sao  Paulo,  1952-1955. 

As  a  result  of  this  work  I  was  invited  to  join  the  SENAI,  and  was 
put  in  charge  of  the  Service  of  Industrial  Training  for  the  Visually 
Handicapped,  here  in  Sao  Paulo.   Later  I  was  promoted  to  Supervisor 
of  the  Selection  and  Guidance  of  the  Trained ,  and  now  am  Head  of 
the  Service  of  Industrial  Training  for  the  Visually  Handicapped  of 
SENAI 0 

-  Member  of  several  technical  committees  for  the  professional 
rehabilitation  of  the  visually  handicapped. 

-  Member  of  the  World  Council  for  the  Welfare  of  the  Blind  -  WCWB. 

-  Brazilian  Delegate ,  as  designated  by  the  President  of  the  Republic, 
to  the  IV  World  General  Assembly  of  the  World  Council  for  the 
Welfare  of  the  Blind.  New  Delhi,  October  1969 . 

-  Pounding  Member  of  the  Brazilian  Association  of  Educators  of 
the  Visually  Handicapped. 

-  Permanent  Member  of  the  Pauiista  Society  of  Psychology. 

-  Member  of  the  Study  Center  "Roberto  Mange". 

PUBLICATIONS 

-  "Professional  Utilization  of  Blind  Workers",  SENAI,  1955. 

-  "Experience  with  PMC  Test  on  the.  Blind,  -  Latin-American 
Psycho-technic  Seminar, 

-  "Blind  Workers  in  Pauiista  Industries",  SENAI,  1968. 

-  Three  Documentary  Films,  SENAI,  1956,  1968  and  1975. 

-  Several  Articles  and  interviews  published  in  journals  in  cities 
visited  to  promote  the  employment  of  the  visually  handicapped. 


Geraldo  Sandoval  de  Andrade 


further  Professional  Activities 


Implantation  of  the  Service  of  Industrial  Training  for  the 

Visually  Handicapped  for  the  SENAI  of i 

Bahia,  1963-1964-1965?  Minas  Gerais,  1970;  Espirito  Santo,  1971? 

Guanabara,  1973;  Ceara,  1973;  Rio  Grande  do  Norte,  1973; 

M  araiihao,  1973;   Paraiba;  Para;   and  Parana. 

Consultants   Educandario  Sao  Jose  Operario  and  Federal  Technical 

School,  Compos, Rio  de  Janeiro,  to  promote  the  employment  of 

visually  handicapped  and  the  admission  of  students  with  the  same 

deficiency  in  the  second  school. 


-  Participated  as  speaker  and/or  observer  at  several  Seminar  and 
Congresses  on  applied  psychology  and  professional  rehabilitation; 
among  then; 

-  Pan-American  Conference  for  the  Prevention  of  Blindness  and 
Services  to  the  Visually  Handicapped  -  Sao  Paulo,  1954. 

-  Latin- American  Seminar  on  Psychology  -  Sao  Paulo,  1955. 

-  International  Congress  on  Social  Work,  Rehabilitation  Sector, 

Petropolis,  R.J. ,  1961. 

-  Second  Brazilian  Congress  on  the  Education  of  the  Visually 
Handicapped,  Brasilia,  DoP.  1968. 

Studies  and  Researches 

Began  the  first  researches  done  among  450  paulista  industrial  firms 
to  identify  and  classify  the  work  market  for  the  visually  handicapped a 
2000  anaiises  wore  made  on  jobs  considered  compatible  with  a 
condition  of  a  visually  handicapped.   The  same  studies  were  carried 
our  in  Bauru,  Ribeirao  Pre to,  Franca,  Campinas,  Limeira.  Piracicaba, 
Sorocaba,  Vinhcdo,  Mogi  das  Cruses,  Santos,  in  the  State  of  S.Paulo; 
Belo  Horizonte  (MS);  Salvador  (BA);  Vitoria  (ES);  Campos  (RJ)   - 
1952-1971. 


Elected  President  of  the  Brazilian  Association  for  the  Education  of 
the  Visually  Handicapped  -  ABEDEV,  in  Cur  itib  a  (Parana),  'luring  the 
IV  Brazilian  Congress  for  the  Visually  Handicapped-  July  27/31,1975. 

1977  -  Counselor  of  the  Anne  Sullivan  Foundation. 


A  Speech  About  i-iv  Life  :£cperiences 
Leonard  C,  Dowdy 


When  I  was  ly  years  ola,  I  lost  my  sight  and  hearing  clue  to 
sleeping  siciaiess  and  high  fever  which  lasted  nine  weeks.  At  age  four 
there  was  much  activity  with  many  people  coming  to  see  me.  One  such 
visitor  was  a  teacher  from  Perkins.  She  showed  my  parents  how  she  could 
teach  me  communication  by  placing  my  hai.-ds  on  her  face.  My  grandfather 
took  me  on  a  long  and  frightening  b*aln  iddtf  to -Perkins.  After  getting 
used  to  the  tram,  my  irxgnt  leic  me  Dut  l  scull  reiusea  to  eo  ud  tne 
oauiroora.  it  shook  so  terribly  and  there  was  a  strong,  peculiar  smell  that 
bothered  me. 

I  started  school  at  age  five.  Miss  Hall  taught  me  the  Tadoma  method, 
which  ner^  s  placing  the  fingers  on  the  neclc,  hand  on  the  cheek,  and  thumb 
on  the  mouth  to  feel  the  movement  of  facial  expression  and  lip  movement  as 
words  are  formed,  I  learned  65  words  the  first  year  and  doubled  that  the  next 
year.  During  the  next  fifteen  years  I  learned  how  to  read,  type,  spell;  do  waih, 
history,  geography,  and  all  sorts  of  handcraft,  like  woodwork,  metal  and 
other  things.  Of  course,  speechworK  and  rhythm  with  the  piano,  and  learning 
how  to  sing  were  vital  parts  of  the  program,  t lease  don't  ask  me  to  sing 
any  now;  it's  been  so  long  I'm  rusty  at  it, 

After  leaving  Perkins,  I  lived  in  new  York  City  for  5  months, 
working  and  living  at  a  special  home  for  the  blind  and  deaf -blind,  I  learned 
how  to  run  many  different  machines  "and  do  many  different  kinds  of  jobs, 
but  was  never  satisfied.  I  did  not  care  to,  live  there  either  with  all  the 
tall  buildings  and  no  grass  for  so  many  blocks.  Being  homesick,!  left  for 
home  in  Missouri. 

I  lived  with  my  mother  and  brothers  for  two  years,  trying  ay  luck 
on  a  chicken  farm  one  year  ,  and  then  in  town  I  did  very  little:  chair 
caning  or  fixing  pop  wooden  cases,  but  found  too  much  time  on  my  hands  and 
being  close  to  a  nervous  breakdown,  moved  to  Kansas  City.  I  have  been  there 
25  years,  and  have  had  experience  on  jobs  at  several  places.  At  age  26,  I 
met  my  first  wife  ,  and  did  some  part  time  vocational  teaching  at  the 
school  for  the  deaf  in  Iowa,  but  we  broke  up  in  one  year.  Ever  since  age  29 
when  I  met  Betty,  my  second  wife,  she  introduced  me  to  the  deaf  world  and 
we  did  much  travelling  around  America,  and  visited  five  European  countries, 
Canada,  and  now  Brazil. 

After  living  in  the  apartment  for  five  years,  after  getting  married, 
we  bought  our  own  home.  Being  home  owners  can  be  a  rough  experience,  but 
we  like  it  better  than  apartment  life,  where  nothing  exciting  happens.  A 
few  years  ago  my  carpenter  friend  taught  me  how  to  build  my  workshop  on  the 
outside,  but  I  did  90  percent  of  the  work  inside,  even  putting  in  the 
electrical  wires  and  wall  sockets.  You  see,  I  also  had  another  friend  who 
was  a  "jack  of  all  trades."  You  may  wonder  what  "'made  in  the  workshop.  I 
made  a  bookcase,  a  desk  out  of  a  sewing  machine  cabinet  (which  was  never 
finished),  and  ray  first  collection  cabinet,  but  that  was  torn  down.  Now  I 
am  making  my  second  attempt  at  a  larger  china  cabinet.  You  see,  a  long 
time  ago  Perkins,  my  school,  did  not  teach  me  all  the  tricks  in  woodwork  of 
how  to  run  power  tools,  so  I  have  had  to  teach  myself  the  hard  and  long  way, 
with  many  failures  and  worlds  of  patience,  but  not  with  perfection,  because 


I  destroy  them,  when  things  go  wrong.  I  have  made  many  other  things, 
such  as  tables  out  of  closet  doors,  a  small  storage  shed  for  the  lawn 
mower,  a  machine  that  cuts  grass,  and  made  a  large  box  for  storing  lumber. 
I  had  to  destroy  it  though,  because  the  wall  and  the  wood  box  became  warped 
and  I  had  to  put  in  a  new  wall,  I  mean  the  outside  wall,  and  cover  up  the 
whole  outside  with  roofing  shingles  to  protect  the  wood  from  the  weather, 

I  hope  most  of  you  will  be  interested  in  hearing  a  little  about 
the  religious  part  of  my  life.  To  make  things  brief  and  to  the  point,  first 
of  all,  I  had  a  fine  christian  teacher  as  a  little  boy,  who  had  the  Love  of 
God  and  taught  me  about  Jesus  and  the  Cross.  As  a  young  man,  I  studied  many 
different  churches,  but  found  nothing  I  was  looking  for.  Then  in  the  last 
few  years  after  my  Sister  in  the  Holy  Spirit  showed  me  through  her  Testimony 
what  the  Lord  did  for  her,  the  Lord  came  into  my  life,  and  I  received 
the  joy  of  the  Holy  Spirit.  Jesus  our  Living  Son  g€  God  IS  the  Living  Son, 
who  was  given  to  us,  that  by  dying  on  the  Cross,  iie  set  us  free  from  sin,  I 
rejoice  in  the  Lord,  because  the  Catholics  nowadays  have  more  freedom  to 
read  the  Bible,  but  the  most  important  gift  I  believe  is  Jesus  Christ  as  our 
personal  saviour.  I  am  not  here  to  preach,  but  to  sharfe  the  Lord  with  you. 
I  wish  you  to  feel  free  to  Praise  the  Lord  and  not  to  bu  ashamed  to  confess 
the  Lord  with  the  mouth,  believing  in  the  heart  that  God  raised  Christ  from 
the  dead. 

Now  let  me  take  you  back  25  or  so  years  ago  and  tell  you  the  most 
exciting  thing  that  ever  happened  to  me.  When  I  moved  to  Kansas  City,  a 
big  city  90  miles  from  my  hometown  Sedalia,  Missouri,  I  knew  nothing  about 
the  city  and  felt  lost  among  strangers  in  a  strange  place,  I  was  introduced 
to  some  church  friends  and  thstitook  me  into  their  family.  The  fi^st  day  they 
took  me  home  to  dinner.  After  the  meal,  we  sat  around  the  table, and  talked 
for  three  hours  about  the  city,  names  of  streets,  buses,  and  her  oldest  son 
made  up  some  instruction  cards  and  took  me  to  the  bus.  He  got  in  the  car, 
and  followed  me  as  I  learned  how  to  hand  the  card  to  the  driver.  When 
he  tapped  me  on  the  knee,  I  got  off.  Max  met  me,  showed  me  how  to  transfer 
to  another  bus  line.  Whew  I  was  excited  and  nervous,  but  that  was  the 
greatest  experience  and  joy  to  be  able  to  travel  alone.  After  one  year,  I 
even  took  my  first  long-distance  train  ride  alone.  I  have  flown  in  the 
airplane  several  times  alone,  but  someone  drives  me  to  the  airport,  and 
someone  meets  me  when  I  get  off. 

For  the  first  few  years  as  homeowners,  we  tried  our  hands  at 
gardening  and  planted  many  kinds  of  flowers  and  plants.  When  the  season 
was  finished  for  the  year,  and  the  plants  went  to  sleep,  they  looked  just 
like  weeds.  I  dug  them  up  by  mistake  so  we  gave  up  gardening,  but  occasionally 
we  do  plant  tomatoes.  When  Betty  and  I  both  experienced  poison  ivy  from 
working  in  the  flower  bed  or  pulling  up  weeds,  we  gave  up  most  of  the  outdoor 
work,  because  poison  ivy  is  so  unpleasnt. 

In  the  early  years  in  our  home,  I  attempted  grass  cutting  two 
ways.  One  way,  with  a  drum  in  the  center  of  the  yard,  and  a  cable  from  the 
center  to  the  edge  of  the  yard.  As  I  pusbfthe  lawn  mower  around  and  around, 
the  circle  got:  smaller  and  smaller,  but  the  four  corners  of  the  yard  did 
not  get  cut,  so  I  had  to  walk  around  looking  for  the  corners  and  cut  the 
grass  by  feeling  with  the  foot  or  hand.  Another  way,  putting  up  pipes, 
and  stringing  up  thin  ropes  two  feet  apart,  stretched  between  two  pipes. 
Then  after  finishing,  take  everything  down  and  put  them  away.  That 
consumed  a  lot  of  time.  Now  we  hire  other  boys  to  cut  it  for  us. 


For  the  first  many  years  at  the  Peterson  Mfg.  Company  where  I  work 
now,  I  used  to  assemble  lights  for  trailer  trucks  but  got  so  worn  out,  and 
so  very  sleepy  from  doing  the  same  thing  year  after  year.  Then  I  worked  on 
the  pump  jline  making  tire  pumps,  but  +hen  I  got  oil  into  the  skin  of  my  legs 
and  arms  %  caused  me  some  skin  discomfort,  so  I  gave  it  up  and  went  back  to 
light  making.  About  3  years  ago  the  light  assembly  line  was  discontinued, 
and  they  put  us  in  another  department  where  we  do  many  different  kinds  of 
jobs.  I  like  it  so  much  better  than  the  light  making  job,  which  was  so  hard 
on  the  hands  and  left  me  completely  exhausted  at  the  end  of  every  day. 

For  one  year,  while  Betty  was  at  Perkins,  I  worked  at  the  Braille 
writer  factory,  which  was  right  on  the  Perkins  ground,  I  did  many  kinds 
of  jobs,  some  of  them  were  very  tedious  and  delicate,  I  even  worked  wityi 
some  parts  so  tiny  that  I  had  to  powder  my  handsfbo  Hep  the  parts  from 
sticking  to  the  skin.  We  did  nolajLike  living  in  Boston  very  well,  and  were 
so  happy  to  return  to  our  own  cozy  house, 

Because  of  my  dependence  on  the  Tadoma  method,  I  sometimes  run 
into  strangers  who  are  cold  and  refuse  to  put  my  hand  to  their  face  even  after 
I  give  them  my  special  instruction  card,  which  tells  them  how  to  talk  to  me. 
So  that  means  I  had  to  walk  away  from  them  and  find  another  more  friendly 
person,  more  willing  to  try  to  talk  to  me. 

Jobs  I  have  done,  but  they  were  very  brief,  for  a  few  weeks t   making 
mattresses  and  box  springs,  which  is  very  good;  \n  a  battery  company  for 
trucks,  cars  and  tractors,  a  very  bad  job  for  the  blind, unless  they  work 
in  a  shipping  department  which  is  easier  on  the  hands;  and  making  ropes 
for  horses,  very  good  work  but  not  enough  business. 


Testimonial  Of  My  Life  Experiences 
Betty  K.  Dowdy 

I  was  born  deaf  and  I  went  to  a  school  for  oral  deaf  at  the  age  of 
four.  At  the  school,  the  teachers  did  an  excellent  job  teaching  me  how  to 
read  lips  and  speak  fluently.  When  I  was  8  years  old,  the  teacher  took  me 
to  an  eye  doctor  because  I  had  some  problems  with  my  vision,  such  as  near- 
sightedness, tunnel  vision,  and  night  blindness.  The  doctor  confirmed  that 
I  was  suffering  from  the  disease  of  Retinitis  Pigmentosa.  I  had  to  sit 
close  to  the  teacher  to  read  her  lips.  I  could  not  read  some  papers  that 
wore  written  with  a  fine  pencil,  so  I  asked  everybody  to  write  with  a 
heavier  pen.  When  I  graduated,  I  was  able  to  read  lips  fairly  well  and  to 
speak  clearly  enough  to  enter  a  public  high  school.  During  the  four  years 
in  high  school,  I  was  one  of  the  very  few  deaf  at  the  school,  but  I  was  able 
to  adjust  quite  well. 

When  I  was  in  Gallaudate  College,  the  only  college  for  the  deaf, 
my  vision  began  to  worsen  so  I  had  to  go  through  college  with  some  difficulty. 
Reading  books  caused  me  a  lot  of  eye  strain  and  when  ever  I  went  outdoors, 
I  had  to  wear  two  pairs  of  sunglasses.  I  had  to  wear  glasses  with  sunglasses 
clipped  to  them.  When  communicating  with  other  students  who  used  the 
deaf  sign  language,  reading  signs  was  difficult  for  me.  Because  the  signs 
got  out  of  the  range  of  my  limited  vision,  I  prefered  to  use  the  Manual 
Alphabet. 

Shortly  after  my  graduation  in  1950,  my  mother  died  of  cancer. 
I  did  the  housekeeping  and  cooking  for  my  father.  After  a  year  I  got  a 
job  in  a  mattress  factory,  a  workshop  for  the  blind.  During  my  employment 
at  the  workshop,  I  was  taught  how  to  read  Braille .  In  195^,  the  vocational 
rehabilitation  for  the  blind  decided  I  was  capable  enough  to  be  transf ered 
to  be  able  to  work  at  the  hospital.  I  am  still  working  at  the  same  place  and 
its  been  twenty- three  years.  Now  I  am  blind  with  very  little  light 
perception.  For  recreation  and  fellowship,  I  used  to  go  to  the  club  for 
the  deaf  every  Saturday,  One  Saturday,  in  1956,  the  preacher  brought 
Leonard  Dowdy  to  the  club  and  there  I  met  him  and  because  it  was  leap  year, 
I  asked  him  to  go  out  with  me.  We  dated  for  5  months  before  we  got  married. 
It  was  a  tough  decision  to  marry  a  deaf -blind  man,  but  we  seemed  to  be  very 
compatible,  so  I  thought  it  was  alright.  I  was  very  impressed  in  Leonard 
for  being  so  independent  and  being  capable  of  doing  so  many  things,  such  as, 
travelling  on  buses  to  and  from  work,  communicating  with  the  hearing 
people,  cooking,  and  woodworking.  W#  lived  in  a  three  room  apartment  for 
5  years.  After  that,  we  bought  our  own  home.  During  our  early  marriage,  as 
we  sat  side  by  side,  Leonard  would  be  reading  Braille,  I  would  be  watching 
television,  which  very  close  beside  me.  Reading  the  newspaper  became  harder. 
When  I  noticed  Leonard  laughing  while  reading  Braille,  I  was  very  jealous 
because  I  was  missing  reading  the  good  things,  so  I  had  to  learn  how  to 
read  Braille,  Now,  reading       is  my  favorite  entertainment. 

When  we  lived  in  the  apartment  our  doorbell  was  connected  to  a 
light  which  I  could  see  from  each  of  the  three  rooms,  but  Leonard  could 
not  see  the  light.  So,  if  a  visitor  knew  Leonard  was  home,  he  would 
stamp  his  feet  at  the  door  to  get  Leonards  attention.  When  we  bought  a 
home  of  our  very  own,  the  light  system  was  discontinued.  We  hooked  a  fan 
on  wheels  to  the  rtoorbell  system  and  we  rolled  it  from  room  to  room  with 


a  long  trailing  cord.  Later  we  got  tired  of  moving  the  fan  around  because 
I  was  too  active.  We  then  decided  to  buy  six  fans,  one  for  each  room, 
including  the  bathrorm.  They  were  hoisted  up  in  the  corner  of  each  room 
near  the  ceiling,  out  of  the  way.  Later  we  had  our  own  telephone  which  was 
also  hooked  up  to  the  same  doorbell  unit.  So  whera  the  fans  start  blowing 
we  have  to  check  the  phone  first  and  then  go  to  the  door. , 

When  I  could  no  longer  read  lips  by  sight,  I  took  1  year  of 
training  at  Perkins  in  1966,  to  learn  the  new  method  through  vibration, 
called  Tadoma.  I  was  able  to  understand  my  teacher  a  little, but  could  not 
understand  other  people,  I  was  discouraged  and  felt  I  was  too  old  to 
learn  the  Tadoma  method.  MX  means  of  communication  with  other  people 
is,  the  sign  language,  the  Manual  Alphabet,  or  printing  on  the  palm  of  the 
hand,  Leonard  is  still  ahead  of  me  since  he  is  an  expert  at  the  Tadoma  method 

At  home  we  hired  a  secretary  to  help  us  with  our  banking,  paying 
the  bills,  reading  mail,  getting  groceries,  and  making  phone  calls.  She 
visits  us  about  twice  a  week.  Whenever  I  need  her  for  extra  help,  I  call 
her  on  the  phone  and  ask  her  questions.  She  responds  with  saying  yes  three 
times  or  no  once  and  I  am  able  to  feel  the  vibrations  in  a  speaker  next  to 
the  phone.  Recently  we  became  the  proud  owners  of  a  Braille  Telephone 
Teletype  (TTY).  this  machine  is  our  biggest  blessing  because  it  lets  me 
communicate  with  other  deaf  people  who  own  the  TTT.  I  feel  all  deaf -blind 
people  should  own  this  machine,  but  unfortunately  it  is  still  very  expensive.. 

We  are  active  in  the  church  and  go  there  3  times  a  week.  There  are 
many  deaf  people  in  the  church  and  some  of  them  act  as  our  interpreters. 
We  like  to  travel  to  anywhere  in  the  USA,  2  times  ajyear,  to  one  of  the 
conventions  for  the  deaf  or  deaf -blind.  This  way  we  are  assured  of  mAny 
volunteers  to  assist  us. 

We  have  held  jobs  for  many  years  and  make  a  comfortable  Having. 
Although  there  are  not  many  services  for  the  deaf -blind  in  our  city,  we 
are  thankful  because  we  can  keep  many  friends  to  help  us  when  we  need  it. 
Inspite  of  our  double  handicaps  we  seem  to  do  as  well  as  others  around  us. 
Recently  we  celebrated  our  21st  wedding  anniversary  and  I  have  not  regreted 
marrying  Leonard.  I  have  never  been  depressed  over  my  handicap  because 
I  am  reminded  of  my  husband  who  has  the  same  handicaps.  We  keep  ourselves 
busy  so  we  do  not  get  bored.  Leonard  is  a  "jack  of  all  trades"  and  is 
able  to  r^^^air  some  things  around  the  home.  We  try  to  keep  our  shelves 
stocked  with  food.  We  have  special  compartmantsi  in  our  cupboard  for  keeping 
canned  goods.  We  have  extra  supplies  of  household  goods  and  clothes,  so 
we  never  run  out  of  neccessities ,  Occas  ionally  we  make  mistakes,  such 
as  opening  the  wrong  oan,  burning  food,  or  ioismatching  socks.  We  do  know 
that  other  people  around  us  do  make  mistakes,  too. 

We  like  to  help  other  deaf  blind  people  and  share  our  ideas  and 
experiences  with  them.  Leonard  and  I  have  some  problems,  such  as  trying 
to  find  each  other  in  the  house  or  outside.  When  inside,  if  we  cannot  find 
each  other,  one  of  us  would  ring  the  door  fan  and  if  outside,  we  have  a 
buzzer  hooked  to  the  doorbell  system  which  has  a  long  trailing  cord 
about  50  feet  long. 


THE  HANDICAfPEU:  INTEGRATION  Ok  SEGREGATION? 
Jose  Geraldo  Silveira  Bueno 

RESUME" 

The  author  analyzes  rhe  problem  of  the  social  integration  of 
the  handicapped,  from  rhe  following  premise:  are  there  real 
possibilities  of  integration  for  the  handicapped? 
In  the  first  place,  he  analyzes  the  aims  of  the  education  of 
the  handicapped  and  reaches  the  conclusion  that  they  must  be 
of  integration  in  the  general  social  environment,  even  thougn 
the  concrete  results  obtained   are  far  from  desiradle.  So 
far,  very  little  has  been  aone  for  the  effective  insertion  of 
the  handicapped  in  his  community:  the  majority  of  results  are 
still  not  heart-warming  and  a  great  number  of  professionals 
seem  content  with  analyzing  one  specific  aspect,  such  as  pro- 
fessionalization,  and  few  analyze  the  problem  in  a  general  sense 
Although  the  problems  are  still  immense  and  the  results  not 
yet  satisfactory,  the  author  aoes  not.  feel  that  the  solution 
lies  in  incentivating  and  helping  to  create  isolated  sub- 
communities  ot  handicapped.   The  real  sense  of  a  democratic  so- 
ciety is  to  provide  a  productive,  conscious  and  Individually 
satisfying  participation  both  of  those  who  can  be  considered 
the  "majority  as  well  as  the "minorities,  be  they  racial,  reli- 
gious, political  or  of  handicapped.  The  creation  of  sub-commu- 
nities may  facilitate  the  joo  of  the  authorities,  out  it  is 
not,  in  any  way,  the  best  solution  for  the  minorities. 

In  second  place,  the  author  analyzes  the  various  aspects  that 
comprise  the  social  integration  of  the  handicapped,  the  factors 
relating  to  his  future  family  life,  his  professional  activities, 
and,  finally,  his  role  as  an  efiective  member  of  a  community. 


.02. 


Then,  the  author  analyzes  the  pr$:iples  and  processes  ot  rehabili- 
tation and  their  relation  to  social  integration.  He  indicates  a 
falacy,  which  to  his  mind  is  probably  the  most  important:  the  fact 
that  educators  try,  at  any  price,  to  fit   an  entire  population  of 
handicapped  into  their  theoretical  scheme  of  references.  These 
references  should  serve  as  a  guide-line  for  the  work  of  the  tech- 
nician, but  each  individual  should  be  evaluated  separately,  as 
well  as  his  environment,  so  that  the  procedures  used  in  his  reha- 
bilitation be  the  most  suited  to  his  needs  and  of  feasible  appli- 
cation in  tne  milieu  it  is  done,  what  we  cannot  permit  is  that 
professionals  keep  warring  and  trying  to  prove  that  their  proce- 
dures are  the  most  correct  and  efficient  because  tney  are  based 

in  a  more  correct  body  of  theoretical  principles.  This  dispute  is 
highly  wholesome  when  studies  are  being  made  to  further  the  under- 
standing  of  the  problems  of  the  handicapped,  but  not  when  it  in- 
volves  human  beings  in  a  dispute  which  may  bring  us  recognition 
but  that  will  inevitably  be  harmful  to  the  very  individuals  we 
claim  are  the  very  essence  of  our  work.  As  an  example  he  points 
out  the  ever  present   debate  between  residential  schools,  day 
schools  and  the  various  systems  of  medical  attendance.   The 
partisans  of  eacn  of  these  systems  tend  to  foster  this  steril 
and  fruitless  competition,  whose  results  are  highly  negative 
tor  the  handicapped  individual,  who  should  be  the  center  and  aim 
of  our  activities , and  not  of  an  irrational  dispute. 

Another  point  that  requires  attention  is  the  area  of  action  neces- 

ef fective 
sary  to  permit  the/integration  of  the  handicapped.  Therefore  he 

analyzes  the  four  areas  he  considers  fundamental:  a)  the  prepa- 
ration of  the  handicapped;  b)  the  preparation  of  his  parents; 
c)  the  preparation  01  the  professionals;  d)  the  preparation  of 
the  community. ■ 


.Oj. 


Finally,  the  author  presents  a  few  suggestion  on  now  to  benetit 
trom  the  lessons  learned  from  specialized  text-books,  ana  those 
that  practical  experience  has   taught   us,   so  that  we  may  accom- 
plish, better  and  better,  the  work  of  socially  integrating  the 
nandicapped. 


_X>MFT. 


Diagnosis,  evaluation  and  educationale  programming 
of  deaf-blind  children. 

Speech  to  be  given  at  the  First  Brazilian  Seminar  for  the 
Education  of  th   Deaf-Blind  in  Sao  Paulo  November  6-12,  1977 
by  Miss  Lieke  de  Leuvu 

I  am  very  honored  to  be  able  to  ■  participate  in  the  First 
Brazilian  Seminar  for  the  Education  of  the  Deaf-Blind  here 
in  Sao  Paulo. 

This  First  Brazilian  Seminar  for  the  Education  of  the  Deaf- 
Blind  is  a  historical  highlight  of  paramount  interest  in  the 
history  of  special  education  in  Brazil,  even  in  Latin  America. 
I  congratulate  the  organizing  committee   especially  the 
president  Mr.  Geraldo  Sandoval  de  Andrade.  Also  congratulations 
to  the  programming   committees  with  their  successes  in  their 
extensive  work. 

Our  deaf-blind  department  of  the  Institute  for  the  Deaf  in 

Sint  Michielsgestel ,  the  Netherlands  maintains  relations, 

already  for  many  years  with  Miss  Neusa  Bassetto  from  Sao  Caetano 

do  Sul  and  Mrs.  Beatriz  Ana  Rosini  de  Laurino  from. Cordoba  in  Argentin, 

Both  ladies  had  participated  in  the  teacher-training  course  for 

teachers  of  the  deaf-blind  in  our  Institute  for  the  Deaf  in  1969 

and  1973*  Frequent  correspondence  takes  place  between  Sao 

Caetano  do  Sul  and  the  Netherlands  on  all  kinds  of  subjects 

concerning  deaf-blind  children.  Miss  Neusa  Bassetto  has  impressed 

us  as  a  very  idealistic,  hard  working,  and  knowledgeable  woman. 

Last  July  seven  members  of  our  staff  of  the  Institute  for  the 
Deaf  in  St .Michielsgestel  had  come  to  Rio  de  Janeiro  to  conduct 
a  two  week  training  course  for  teachers  of  the  deaf.  Sixty-two 
participants  from  all  over  Brazil  had  come  tc  Rio  de  Janeiro. 
The  need  for  this  course  was  felt  by  a  Dutch  mother  of  a  deaf 
girl  who  lives  in  Brazil  for  over  thirty  years*  Mrs  May  Bijleveld 
do  Couto  initiated ' the  idea  for  this  training  course  fox-  teachers 
of  the  deaf. 

The  realization  had  taken  place  by  her  inspiration  and  through 
national  and  federal  cooperation  of  persons  and  agencies  such  as: 

-  Diretora  Professora  Sarah  Couto  Cesar  of  Centro  Nacional  de 
Educa-'ao  Especial 

-  Professora  Myrthes  de  Luca  Wenzel  of  Secretaria  de  Educacao  e 
Cultura  do  Estado  do  Rio  de  Janeiro.  - 

-  Professora  Esther  Ozon  Montfort  of  Assessoria  de  Desenvolvimento 
de  Recuraos  Humanos. 

and  many  others. 

During  the  three  weeks  in  Ric  de  Janeiro  I  gained  soms  information 

on  the  tremendous  problems  the  nation  of  Brazil  has  to  face  in 

education: 

-  the  enormous  number  of  normal  school  age  children  which  have 
to  be  served. 

-  the  shortage  of  trained  and  qualified  teachers. 

-  the  shortage  of  schooibuildings  and   schooloquipment . 

-  the  long  distances  the  children  have  to  travel  in  thia  vast 
country. 

-  the  illiteracy  of  so  many  parents. 


-2- 


And  most  striking  in  special  education: 

-  the  late  ages  of  referral  to  special  programs  for  the  deaf 

-  un3uf f icient   diagnosis  and  differentiation  within  the 
category  of  handicaps. 

-  the  little  number  of  hours  per  day  or  per  week  the  child 
was  able  to  receive  training  and  education. 

However,  the  visits  to  several  school  for  the  deaf  in  Rio  and 
the  lectures  to  the  teachers  impressed  me  greatly.  The  idealism 
of  the  Brazilian  teachei's,  the  love  and  onderstanding  they 
showed  for  their  children,  was  very  impressive. 
Idealism,  love  for  children,  intuition  are  very  importent 
characteristics  for  all  teachers  especially  fcr  teachers  of  the 
deaf-blind.  But  these  qualities  are  not  enough.  The  education 
of  deaf-blind  children  is  very  difficult  indeed. 

The  training  and  education  of  deaf-blind  children  must  be  based 
on  sound  theoretical  foundations  in  the  teachers  in  order  to 
free  deaf-blind  children  out  of  their  tremendous  isolation. 
Each  deaf-blind  child  has  to  reach  his  or  hers  utmost  capacity. 
That  is  the  child's  human  right  and  the  adults  obligation. 


•3- 


5. 


The  deaf-blind  department  .in  Sint  Michielsgestel,  the  Netherlands 

Just  as  a  scheme  of  reference  I  would  like  to  give  some 
information  about  the  education  of  deaf-blind  children  in  the 
Netherlands.  The  deaf-blind  department  San  Rafael  is  located 
on  the  campus  of  the  Institute  for  the  Deaf  in  St .Michielsgestel . 
It   is  the  only  department  for  deaf-blind  children 
in  the  Netherlands  which  offers  an  educational  program. 
Because  of  the  fact  that  no  facilities  are  available  in  Belgium, 
we  do  accept  children  from  Belgium  from  Flemish  speaking  parents. 

The  Netherlands  is  a  very  small  country  in  comparison  to  'Brazil* 
only  350  kilometers  from  north  to  south  and  250  kilometers  from 
east  to  west.  The  country  counts  13i?  million  inhabitants. 
The  Institute  for  the  Deaf  is  the  only  catholic  school  for  the  deaf 
in  the  Netherlands.  Thi3  institute  was  founded  in  1840  and  is  a 
partially  private  organization.  Priests,  brothers  and  sisters  had 
always  played  a  very  important  role  in  the  care  and  the  education 
in  our  institute.  Al  this  moment  about  500  pre-lingually  deaf 
pupils  are  enrolled.  Practically  all  of  them  are  residential 
students.  I  emphasize  the  term  deaf.  In  many  countries  the 
definition  deaf  is  used  very    loosely.  According  to  our  philosophy 
the  term  deaf  and  hard-of-hearing  has  to  be  defined  as  follows: 

-  a  child  will  be  called  deaf  when  is  hearing  loss  is  so  severe 
that  -  even  with  the  best  amplification  and  with  the  best  possible 
auditory  training-he  never  will  reach  a  level  of  understanding 
speech  mainly  by  hearing  v. Uden  1951,  19&8). 

Usually  the  child's  hearing  loss  is  over  90  dB  Fletcher-index, 
I.S.O.  The  deaf  child  has  to  acquire  language  mainly  by  his 
visual  sense, namely  by  lipreading.  His  residual  hearing  has  to 
be  trained  to  support  his  lipreading. 

"Nevertheless  all  these  children  can  wear  hearing  aids,  even 
the  deafest   among  them,  as  a  help  for  lipreading,  especially 
with  respect  to  the  rhythm  of  language".  (v.Uden  1952.  1968) 

-  a  child  will  be  called  hard-of-hearing  when  he  can  acquire 
language  by  its  main  channel  of  hearing.  Lipreading  has  to 
be  trained  to  supplement  the  auditory  input. 

The  term  "pre-lingual"  is  used  when  the  hearing  loss  is  congenital 
or  acquired  before  the  age  of  three  and  the  child  has  not  yet 
acquired  a  symbolic  system  (v.Uden  1968). 

The  educational  program  for  deaf  children  and  children  who  are 

hard-of  hearing  is  different,.  This  requires  school  solely  for 

the  deaf  and  solely  for  the  hard-of-hearing. 

Ve  have  in  our  country  5  schools  for  the  deaf  and  approximately 

20  schools  for  the  hard-of-hearing. 

In  our  Institute  for  the  Deaf  all  deaf  children,  also  the 

multihandicapped,  are  educated  orally  as  much  as  possible. 


The  normal  deaf  children  are  educated  purely  orally  according 
to  the  maternal  reflective  method  developed  by  Dr.  A.  van  Uden 
(v.Uden  1952,  1968). 

In  comparison  to  other  deaf-blind  departments  in  the  world  our 
deaf-blind  department  is  relatively  young  in  existence.  In  1961 
the  first  deaf-blind  ruoella  girl  was  admitted  in  the  Institute. 
In  January  1 962  we  started  the  deaf-blind  department  with  5 
rubella  children  in  a  small  house,  hue  to  the  increase  of  enroll- 
ments a  new  building  had  to  be  designed  in  1967*  As  far  as  I  know 
it  is  the  first  new  building  in  the  world  especially  designed 
for  deaf-blind  children.  <- 

According  to  our  phylosophy  school  and  residential  setting  must 
be  fully  integrated  in  one  continuum  program  during  the  children's 
waking  hours.  No  separate  school  building  and  no  separate  residential 
building  have  been  built.  School  and  residence  ax-e  fully  integrated 
in  one  building. 

The  way  a  mother  educates  her  little  child  in  hex-  home,  the  way 
she  engages  the  child  in  all  the  domestic  activities  such  as  setting 
the  table, cleaning  up,  doing  the  dishes  etc.  was  kept  in  mind 
for  educational  programming. 

At  this  moment  20  children  are  enrolled  and  all  are  residents. 
Their  ages  range  from  3  to  20  years  of  age.  Nine  classroom  teachers 
and  27  houseparents  or  child-care  workers  are  serving  these 
children  daily.  Also  other  teachers  and  specialists  are  working 
for  special  classes  and  subjects  such  as  speech,  gymnastics, 
swimming,  physio-therapiy ,  music,  mobility-training,  arts  and 
crafts,  coocking  and  home  economics,  prevocational  training  etc. 
The  28  children  are  divided  over  5  units,  5  groups.  Arranging 
these  children  in  groups  is  very,  very  difficult  but  has  to  be 
done  carefully  especially  from  educational  point  of  view.  The 
children  should  be  combined  in  a  group  according  to  their  level 
of  functioning  and  the  communication  method  they  use.  A  child 
who  can  acquire  oral  language  should  not  be  in  the  same  group 
where  f ingerspelling  or  signing  is  used  by  other  children. 
The  criteria  for  placing  the  child  in  the  right  group  -  the  level 
of  functioning  and  the  method  of  communication  -  can  only  be 
found  by  good  diagnosis  and  evaluation  of  the  child.  Medical  and 
psycho-educational  assessment  should  be  done  by  very  experienced 
and  knowledgeable  specialists. 

However,  the  right  medical  indentif ication  of  deaf-blindne3S  is 
a  pre-requisite  in  order  to  refer  the  child  for  psycho-educational- 
assessment.  Medically  spoken  deaf-blind  children  are  very  complex. 
They  require  services  and  treatments  of  many  specialists  such  as 
ophthalmologist,  otologist  and  audiologist,  pediatrician,  cardio- 
logist, pediatric  neurologist  etc.  So  many  deaf-blind  children 
are  not  properly  indentified  because  they  are  the  first  ones 
each  specialist  meets  in  his  practice. 
It  still  happens  in  our  country  too! 

Especially  ophthalmologists  and  audiologists  are  looking  for 
specific  defined  definitions  of  blindness  and  deafness  in  these 
children.  Many  children  are  not  able  to  cooperate  during  the 
traditional  assessment  procedures  and  are  sent  hone.  An  other 
examination  will  be  advised  to  the  parents  and  child  some  months 
later.  Very  important  time  for  early  stimulation  and  intervention 
are  lost  from  developmental   and  educational  point  of  view. 

-5- 


If  no  coordination  tak-e«— place  betveen  the  medical  specialists 
correct  diagnosis  of  a  deaf-blind  child  does  not  take  place  due  to 

unfamiliarity  with  the  definition  of  deaf-blindness  and  due  to 
lack  .of  knowledge  of  deaf-blind  children  especially  rubella  children. 
Deaf-blind  children  are  easily  misdiagnosed  as  severly  mentally 
retarded.  They  will  be  referred  to  institutions  for  the  mentally 
retarded  without  proper  psycho-educational  assessment.  Early 
identification  and  diagnosis  of  deaf-blindness  in  children  and 
early  referral  is  urgently  requested  from  all  the  medical 
disciplines  in  order  to  start  early  intervention  for  child  and 
parents . 

In  some  countries  identification  and  diagnosis  takes  place  in 
special  diagnostic  centers  by  a  multidisciplinary  team  of  medical 
and  educational  specialists  (Curtis  and  Donlon,  1 9^9 )  or  by  an 
interdisciplinairy  approach  "using  a  number  of  specialists  but 
arranging  for  actual  inperson  exchange  between  the  specialists 
and  even  mutual,  simultaneous  observation  of  a  child"  (Robbins 
1975,  1977). 

In  our  country  no  law  exists  which  doctors  oblige  to  register 
a   handicapped  child.  Referrals  of  children  to  our  deaf-blind 
department  come  from  hospitals,  audiological  centers,  parents, 
schools  for  the  deaf  or  hard~of-hearing  etc.  Usually  the  children 
have  been  seen  by  many  medical  specialists.  The  medical  coordinator 
of  our  Institute,  an  otologist,  collects  all  the  possible  information 
on  medical  history  of  the  child  and  the  family.  Also  the  social 
worker  of  our  home-training  program  visits  parents  and  child  at 
home.  She  prepares  the  family  for  the  psycho-educational  assessment 
at. the  deaf-blind  department.  In  some  cases  the  social  worker 
and  I  go  to  the  family  together  to  assess  the  child  first  in  his 
familiar   environment.  I  usually  videotape  the  child  at  home  for 
eome  minutes,  The  following  areas  are  taped: 

1 )  an  unstructured  situation: 

the  child  is  free  to  accupy  himself  the  way  be  prefers  the  most. 
During  these   unstimulated  minutes  we  observe  all  kinds  of 
stereotyped  or  autislike  behavior  patterns. 

2)  a  parent-child  interaction: 

the  parents  are  asked  to  show  activities  the  child  likes  the 
most  for  interaction. 

3)  a  task  orientation: 

the  parents  are  asked  to  introduce  new  tasks  the  child  which, 
he  or  she  had  not  done  before. 

4)  a  self-help  skill: 
usually  drinking  or  eating. 

For  more  detailed  information  on  a  video-tape  protocol  for 
examination  of  multi handicapped  deaf-blind  see  the  publication 
of  Curtis  and  Donlon  1972. 


Diagnosis  and  evaluation 

One  of  the  most  difficult  jobs  we  can  encouter  in  the  field  of 

education  is  the  diagnosis  and  the  evaluation  of  deaf-blind 

children. 

Why  are  diagnosis  and  evaluation  of  deaf-blind  children  so 

extremely  difficult? 

First  of  all  the  deaf-blind  population  itself  is  so  immensely 

varied  and  complicated. 

The  composition  of  the  group  of  children  who  belong  to  the 

education  of  the  deaf-blind  is  very  small  and  heterogeneous 

in  comparison  to  children  who  belong  to  the  education  of  the  deaf 

or  the  education  of  the  blind. 

According  to  the  world  wide  accepted   defintion  of  deaf-blindness  we 

consider  children  deaf-blind  as: 

"....  children  who  have  auditory  and  visual  handicaps , the  combination 

of  which  causes  such  severe  communication  and  other  developmental 

and  educational  problems  that  they  can  not  properly  be  accommodated 

in  special  education  programs  solely  for  the  hearing  handicapped 

child  or  for  the  visually  handicapped"  (Centers  and  services  for 

Deaf-Blind  children,  1973). 

The  deaf-blind  children  have  auditory  and  visual  impairments  in 

great  varieties  of  combinations,  namely  profoundly  deaf-  and 

totally  blind  to  hard-of-hearing  and  partially  sighted. 

Besides  the  variety  of  sensori  inpairments  we  meet  in   our  11  boys 

and  17  girls 

1)  a  diversity  of  etiologies  causing  the  handicaps 

2)  a  diversity  of  age 3  of  onset  of  the  sensori  impairments 

3)  a  diversity  of  additional  physical  handicaps 

4)  a  diversity  of  ages  of  referral  to  and  enrollment  into  a  program 

5)  a  diversity  of  developmental  level  of  functioning 

6)  a  diversity  of  intelligence 

7)  a  diversity  of  behavioral  and  emotional  disturbances 
8;  a  diversity  of  learning  disorders 

ad  1.  diversity  of  etiologies: 

in  our  department  we  find  the  following  etiologies  as  causes 
of  deaf-blindness: 

-  Maternal  rubella  (7  boys  and  8  girls) 

-  Usher's  syndrome  (2  boys  and  1  girl) 

-  Rhesusfactor  with  eevere  myopia  gravis  and  amblyopia  (2,  girls) 

-  Toxoplasmosis?   (1  girl) 

-  Prematurity  and  hydrocephaly  (1  girl) 

-  Prematurity  with  multiple  birth-defects  (1  girl) 

-  Braintumor  (1  girl) 

-  Unknown  (  1  boy  and  2  girls) 

ad  2.  diversity  of  ages  of  onset: 

The  age  of  onset  of  the  dual  sensori  impaiment  in  above 
mentioned  etiologies  varies  greatly.  In  maternal  rubella, 
toxoplasmosis,  but  also  in  cytomegalovirus  or  syphilis,  we 
are  dealing  with  congenital  infections  and  impairments  of 
both  senses  at  the  same  time. 

In  meningitis  and  brain  tumor  the  dual  sensori  impairment 
is  acquired  postnatally  and  either  pre-or  post  tin    gnally. 
However,  in  children  suffering  from  Usher's  Syndrome  deafness 
can  be  diagnosed  quite  early  in  comparison  to  their  progressive 
visual  impairment. 


Only  by  vory  sophisticated  screening  procedures  such  as 

E.R.G.  or  E.O.C.  one  may  be  sure  at  the  age  of  5  -  6  that  children< 

have  tapo to-retinal  degeneration. 

ad  5«  diversity  of  additional  physical  handicaps: 

besides  t. ho  hearing  and  visual  impairments  many  additional 

pshysica]  handicaps  can  be  registered  especially  in  rubella 

children. 

The  most  common  additional  handicaps  are:  heartdef ects , 

neurological  impairments  such  as  seizures,  cleft  palate,  severe 

motor  problems  due  to  cerebral  palsy , metabolic  disorders  etc. 

ad  4.  diversity  of  ages  of  referral: 

out  of  the  28  children  only  A    children  could  be  enrolled 
before  their  fourth  birthday.  Nine  children  had  a  been  enrolled 
between  their  fourth  and  fifth  birthday.  Nine  children  had  been 
enrolled  between  their  fifth  and  seventh  birthday. 
This  groan  had  either  no  program  at  all  or  they  had  been  in 
daycaro  centers  for  the  multihandicapped  in  their  local  community. 
Six  children  had  been  enrolled  after  their  seventh  birthday 
with  no  adequate  education  to  their  specific  needs.  Almost  50 
percent  of  the  population  in  our  department  had  been  referred 
before  the  age  of  five. 

However,  many  children  had  not  been  provided  with  a  hearing  aid 
and/or  glasses  or  had  not  learned  to  wear  the&m  before  entrance. 

ad  5.    diversity  of  developmental  level  of  functioning: 

due  to  the  sensory  deprivation  either  through  late  medical 
and  auditory  remediation  or  through  lack  of  developmental 
stimulation  we  can  encounter  low  functioning  children.  Some- 
times those  children  function  even  under  half  below  their 
chronological  age  -  on  scales  for  developmental  assessment. 
Some  children  score  only  one  or  two  years  below  their  age  level. 

ad  6.  diversity  of  intelligence: 

as  in  the  normal  population  we  find  the  scala  of  spreading 
of  the  intelligence.  However,  due  to  the  dual  sensori 
impairments  the  intellectuel  capacity  of  many  children  is 
difficult  to  test  especially  when  they  show  severe  behavioral 
and  emotional  problems. 

ad  7»  diversity  in  behavioral  and  emotional  problems: 

the  group  of  rubella  children  may  show  severe  behavioral  and 
emotional  problems. 

Especially  the  severely  handicapped  rubella  children  may  . 
show  bizarre  stereotyped  behavior  patterns  which  show  resem- 
blance of  children  with  autisme.  This  autistic  like  behavior  or 
stereotype  behavior  may  be  the  result  of  early  infantile 
depri vat  ion  or  may  manifest  itself  on  the  base  of  brain 
damage . 

Besides  autistic  like  behavior  we  may  see  severe  eating  and 
chewing  problems,  sleeping  problems,  suddenly  change  in  mood 
without     apparent  reason  etc. 

Besides  she  above  described  rubella  children,  we  have  children 
who  function  much  more  socially  and  show  much  more  interest 
in  the  world  of  persons  and  the  world  of  objects. 
The  children  with  Usher's  Syndrome  may  develop  as  normal  deaf 
children,  but  who  after  very  careful  observation  show  problems 
in  mobility  inside  and  outside  especially  at  night. 


-8- 


a. 


Tunnelvision  and  nightblindness  make  them  insecure  behavioral 
and  emotional  wise. 

ad  8*  diversity  of  learning  disorders: 

through  intensive  research  by  Dr.  A.  van  Uden  (1968,  1970) 

and  Drs.J.  van  Dijk  (1971 )  better  insight  had  been  gained 

in  the  learning  and  communication  disorders  in  deaf  and 

deaf-blind  children.  This  will  be  discusses  later  in  more 
detail. 


It  is  a  fact  that  the  deaf-blind  population  is  so  varied  and 
complex  that  standardized  tests  for  psycho-educati onal  assessment 
are  not  available  as  such. 

Only  by  very  refined   and  tenuous  clinical  observation  we  cah  get 
an  idea  where  to  start  for  assessment  and  where  to  look  for 
educational  planning. 

A)  the  most  difficult  group  of  children  to  assess  are  those  who 
are  not  motorically  involved  in  their  environment,  who  are  not 
ambulatory  either  due  to  physical  conditions  and/  or  immaturity 
or  to  lack  of  appeal  of  the  outer  world.  These  children  exhibit 
severe  stereotyped  or  autisticliko   behavior  patterns.  They  do 
not  imitate. 

They  are  not  interested  in  the  world  of  persons,  objects,  pictures 
etc.  This  group  functions  at  the  level  of  sensation.  Their  residual 
vision  and  hearing  are  not  yet  developed  as  distance  senses  as  such. 
They  only  use  their  residual  vision  and  hearing  for  bodily 
sensation  and  not  to  get  information  from  the  outer  world.  As  a 
matter  of  fact  the  outer  world  does  not  exist  for  them. 
"A  personal,  f eely-chosen,  reflective  and  conscious  connection 
of  these  children  with  their  outer  world  fails  to  develop.  They 
live  an  auto-erotic  life,  an  unconscious,  pathic  and  bodily  life. 
On  this  undifferentiate]  pathic  level  of  existence  the  child's 
body  experiences  things  subjectively;  it  functions  in  its  totality 
as  a  source  of  pleasure"  (Prick  1971 )• 

It  is  very  hard  to  find  an  element  of  intentionality  in  the 
behavior  of  these  children  -  intentionality  towards  the  world  of 
people  and/or  the  world  of  objects,  Usually  ly  observing  these 
children  in  an  unstimulated   environment  we  see  a  very  broad  variety 
•of  stereotyped  or  autisticlike   behavior  patterns  e.g.  stimulation 
of  the  proprioceptive   and  kinesthetic  sense  by  rolling,  rocking, 
spinning  around,  waving  their  hands,  hyperventilation  etc. 
Other  childeren  enjoy  sensation  of  all  kinds  of  visual  stimulation 
such  as  lightgazing,  moving  all  kinds  of  shiny  objects  in  front 
of  their  eyes,  fingergazing.  Other  children  may   enjoy,  tactile 
stimulation  by  rubbing  their  body  especialev  their  genitals, 
rubbing  objects  with  their  mouth  and/or  fingers ,  tactile-auditory 

■    stimulation  by  ear  pumping  etc. 

By  close  observation  and  by  applying  the  technique  of  operant 
conditioning  we  look  for  the  most  enjoyable  avenue  for  the 
child  e.g.  vision,  vibration,  movements.  One  of  these  modalities 
can  be  used  as  reinforcer  for  further  conditioning  techniques 
either  according  to  the  classical  or  the  operant  way. 
The  examiner  should  by  very  sensitive  to  the  most  tenuous  sign  of 
behavior  in  the  child  e.g.  sucking  movements,  vocalization  or 
any  other  motor  expression. 

These  slightest  and  most  delicate  body  expressions  should  be 
used  to  condition  in  order  to  elucite  the  orientative  reflex. 
By  counting  the  number  of  trials  until  the  child  develops  the 
requires  response  we  may  get  some  information  on  the  speed  of 
learning  to  develop  anticipatory  behavior. 
The  modality  the  child  likes  the  most  e.g.  the  proprio- 
kinesthetic  sense  or  visual  sense  must  become  the  avenue  for 
further  training  and  educational  prcgi amming. 


-10- 


.10, 


In  case  no  anticipation  develops  and  the  conditioning    techniques 
are  too  difficult  to  apply  we  consider  these  children  too 
severely  retarded   to  be  enrolled^  in  our  educational  program. 
These  children  will  be  referred  to  an  institution  for  the  blind 
mentally  retarded.  This  group  of  children  will  need  custodial 
care  for  the  rest  of  their  lives.  However,  they  need  a  very  good 
stimulating  program  which  focalize  upon  training  especially  in 
dependent  living  skills. 


>r 


To  summarize: 

in  this  difficult  group  of  children  described  above  we  look  fo: 

the  right  reinforcer  to  be  used  for   operant  01?  classical 

conditioning. 

We  carefully  observe  the  speed  of  learning  anticipatory  behavior 

patterns.  Besides  these  criteria  the  social  maturity  should  be 

assessed  e.g.  by  the  Maxfield-Buchholtz  scale  for  preschool  blind 

children. 

If  the  visual  loss  is  not   too  severe  we  use  our 

developmental  scale  for  young  deaf  children  (v.Uden  1 97 5 ) • 

Other  early  developmental  scales  for  cognitieve  development 
may  be  used  "as  a  springboard  for  crucial  observations  related 
to  the  child  management"  (Robbins,  1977)  • 

-  the  Gesell  Developmental  Tests 

-  the  Cattel  Infant  Scale 

-  the  Bayley  Scales  of  Infant  Development 

-  the  Denver  Developmental  Scale 

In  order  to  get  better  insight  in  the  deviant  behavior  and  the 
emotional  development  of  the  child  we   use  the  following  inven- 
tories as  parameters  for  further  study  and  guidance: 

-  an  inventory  on  austistic  behavior  van  Uden  1974>  van  Dijk, 
de  Leuw  1975 

-  an  inventory  on  desolation  syndrome  van  Uden  1969 

These  inventories  will  be  filled  out   together  with  the  parents 

to  discuss  and  explain  the  deviant  behavior  in  their  child  and 

their  own   attitude  towards  the  child.  Their  attitude  may  be: 

overprotecting  or  overdemanding  their  child,  as  well  as  spoiling 

or  neglecting. 

By  filling  out  the  inventories  e.g.  one  time  per  year  we  gain 

a  better  insight  in  behavioral  change  of  the  child  over  a  period 

of  time. 

The  inventory  on  autistic  behavior  is  based  on  the  theoretical 

philosophy  of  autism  and  infantile  autism  of  authors  such  as 

Kanner,  Prick,  Rimland,  Rutter  and  others,  but  has  been 

modified  to  over  deaf-blind  children. 

The  inventory  lists  100  items  on  all  kinds  of  observable  deviant 

behavior  such,-  as  rocking,  eyepoking,  compulsive  behavior  such  as 

sameness,  closing/opening  doors,  interest  in  mechanical  toys  etc. 

The  inventory  on  desolation  syndrome   had  been  develop  by  van  Uden 

(1969»  1973) «He  prefers  the  term  "desolation-syndrome"    instead 

of  neglection  of  affection  or  maternal  deprivation. 

These  terms  may   give  the  impression  that  the  parents  are  the 

cause  of  the   child's  behavior,  which  is  not  true  in  so  many  cases 

This  inventory  deals  with  the  relation  and  interaction  of  parents 

and  child.  If  the  parents  accept  their  child  and  if  the  child 

feels  himself  accepted. 


•11 


11. 

B)  An  other  group  of  children  iunctions  on  a  higher  developmental 
level.  They  are  motorically  and  socially  more  matured.  They 
are  more  able  to  cope  v/ith  newly  introduced 
stimuli. 

They  have  established  some  intentionality r  towards  their  outer 
world,,  towards  the  world  of  persons  and  objects . .Stereotyped  or 
autisticlikejbehavior  patterns  may  be  also  observed  in  this 
group,  however  the  patterns  are  not  so  severe.  They  are  more 
easily  to  be  interfered. 

By  close  observation  of  the  behavior  and  by  play  with  the  child 

we  find  some  good  reinforcers  which  can  be  used  for  condioning 

techniques  either  the  operart  or  classical  way. 

These  children  develop  the  required  response  after  2-3  trials 

and  learn  to  develop  anticipatory  behavior  much  quicker. 

Most  of  these  children  like  a  flash  light  or  another  light 

source.  In  some  ca:;es  the  use  of  slides  can  be  applied  even 

when  no  pictoral  representat ion  had  been  developed.  These  children 

are  able  to  show  the  beginning  of  imitative   behavior. 

The  ability  to  anticipate  and  to  imitate  are  the  most  important 

critera   for  the  development  of  the  language  acquisition 

When  anticipation  and  imitation  are  present  the  introduction 

of  natural  signs  can  be  initiated  as  a  first  step  towards  language 

acquisition  (v.Dijk  1965)* 

We  should  be  aware  of  the  fact  that  learning  disabilities  may 
manifest  itself  already  in  this  group  of  children. 
In  imitating  body  movements  we  can  observe  severe  problems  in 
spatial  relationships,  esp.  in  the  imitation  of  a— symmetric 
body  positions.  Secondly  we  may  observe  dificulties  when  they 
have  to  imitate  a  natural  sign.  They  do  not  remember  the 
sequence  of  movements  to  produce  a  sign.  Thisi©  caused  by  their 
problems  in  intransitive  movements. 

If  intentionality,  imitation  and  attention  towards  visual 
stimuli  is  present  in  the  child  the  examiner  may  use  many 
more  tests  during  his  assessment  e.g.  tests  for  cognitive 
functioning:  -  Hiskey  -  Nebraskatest  of  learning  aptitude 
for  the  deaf 

-  Leiter  international  performance  scale 

-  Sni jders-Oomen  non-verbal  test 

-  Wechler  preschool  and  primary  scale  of 
intelligence  (WPPSl) 

-  Ontario  school  ability  examination 


-12- 


12. 
C.  The  last  group  of  children  to  be  discuss  3d  is  the  group  of  rubella 

children  in  the  deaf-blind  department  wh)  develop  themselves  reia- 

tivily  very  well.  Language  acquisition  s barts  to  develop.  They  impress 

visitors  by  their  normal  intelligence  ani  good  educational  potentials 

However  assessing  this  group  of  children  they  resemble  a  broad 

variety  of  disorders  in  language  acquisition. 

Also  congenitally  deaf  children  with  progessive  visual  loss  such 

as  children  with  Usher's  Syndrome  or  meningitis  cases  belong  to 

this  category. 

Through  the  intensive  research  of  v#  Uden  (1968)  and  v.  Dijk  (  1 97 1  ) 

better  insight  had  been  developed  in  the  language  and  learning 

disorders  of  our  deaf-blind  children.  According  to  the  findings 

of  v.  Uden  20  to  2^°/o   of  the  deaf  population  of  our  Institute 

do  show  learning  problems ^ which  hampers  language   acquisition 

solely  orally  according  to  the  matenial  reflective  method  (v. Uden  1 968 ) 

They  fail  to  learn  to  speak  fluently  despite  normal  intelligence, 

enormous  efforts  of  the  staff  and  a  good  educational  program. 

Clumsiness  of  behavior  or  dyspraxia  is  the  basic  f 

disorder  in  this  group  of  children. 

"Eupraxia   can  be  described  as  planned  behaviour,  behaviour 

according  to  planned  movements.  It  entails   being    able  to 

find  and  coordinate  one's  limbs  quickly  and  correctly,  being  able 

to  steer,  retain  and  reproduce  movements.  This  planned  behaviour 

does  not  only  concern  the  major,  but  also  the  fine  motor  functions 

(articulo-motor  function)".  (v. Dijk, v.Uden  1 97 6 )  . 

We  encounter  dyspracxialt  in  practically  all  our  congenitally 
deaf-blind  children. 

Dyspraxia   is  the  result  of  neurologi cal  disorders  and  the 
underdeveloped  sensorimotor  functions,  Due  Hthe  lack  of  intentionality 
towards  the  outer  world,  eye-hand  and  eye-foot  coordination  are 
poorely  developed.  Planned  movements  are  poorly  coordinated. 
Automatization  of  the  sensorimotor  functions  does  not  occur- 
due  to  poor  training  of  the  sensorimotor  functions  as  such  and 
due  to  impairment  of  eupraxia. 

Another  aspect  wich  has  an  important  impact  on  dyspraxia   is 
dysrhythmia. 

"One  can  indeed  state  that  eupraxia  and  eurhythmies  form  a  strongly 
integrated  function"  ( v.Di jk, v.Uden  1976). 

Dyspraxia   and  dysrhythmia  are  usually  the  reason  why  a  deaf  child 
or  a.  deaf-blind  child  articulates,  speaks  poorly. 
An  additional  disorder  is  its  poor  memory  for  successive  data 
such  as  in  lipreading.  On  the  other  hand  the  child  usually  shows 
a  strong  memory  for  vinu.il  simul tu^neous  data  such  as  pictures, 
geometric  figures  etc. 

The  right  diagnosis  of  the  dyspraxia,  dysrhythmia   and  poor 
memory  for  successive  data  are  being  important  for  proper 
educational  programming. 

Van  Uden  had  developed  a  whole  test  battery  to  diagnose 
the  dyspractic'  problems  in  the  young  children. He  uses  the 
following  tests. 
(For  further  information  see  his  book  1968) 

-  The  intransitive  motor  ability  test  to 

test:  a)  gross  motor  coordination  of  arms  and  legs 

b)  gross  rhythmic  movements  of  the  arms 

c)  fine  movements  of  she  fingers 

-  The  Fine  Rhythmic  movement  "est: 

(an  adaptation  of  the  Stambak  rhythm-test) 

-  Hiskey-Nebraska  test: 

subtests  e.g.  visual  attention  span, bead  patterns,  picture 
identification  and  memory  for  colors.- 

-13- 


Benton-test : 

to  reproduce  geometric  figures 


13- 


-14- 


14. 


Educational  programming 

f 
Only  by  early  diagnosis  and  evaluation  of  the   learing  profile 
of  the  child,   we  can  set  our  educational  goals  in  order  to 
create  the  best  possible  educational  facilities  for  each  child. 
According  to  our  phylosophy  we   look  for  the  strong  side  in  the 
child  to  start  his  education  and  to  train  his  weak  aide  as  much 
as  possible. 

Education  and  stimulation  should  not  just  take  place  during  the 
hours  the  teachers  are  present,  but  should  occur  all  the  waking 
hours  of  the  child. 

Also  the  mother  of  a  normal  child  stimulates  and  educates  her  child 
the  whole  day. 

Parents,  teachers  and  houseparent3  have  to  work  very  close   together 
to  realize  the  unity  in  educational  programming  and  handling. 
This  is  the  reason  why  our  house-parents  also  teach  under  the 
supervision  of  the  child's  teacher.  Also  parents   come  as  much  as 
possible  to  work  with  their  child. 

It  will  not  be  possible  to  describe  the  educational  programming  in 
detail   but  I  will  elaborate  on  the  most  important  aspects  of  the 
described  categories  of  children. 

A)  The  low  functioning  child 

For  the   difficult,  the  low  functioning  children  it  is  of 
extreme  importance    that  consistancy  in  educational  handling 
and  programming  is  guarded. 

The  number  of  adults  handling  the  children  should  be  carefully 
watched.  Also  the  activities  planned  for  each  day  should  shew 
consistancy  and  structure. 

Only  by  consistancy  and  structure  we  can  create  a  safe  and 
secure  world  for  this  group  of  children  who  do  not  show  inten- 
tionality  in  their  behavior.  A  good  "person-to  -  person-relationship' 
should  be  the  base  for  sharing  all  kinds  of  fainiliair  daily 
activities  such  as  bathing, dressing,  eating,  moving  etc.  Most 
children  never  experienced  the  outer  world  mo torically. Therefore 
we  start  moving  with  the  child  in  close  body  contact.  We  use 
very  simple  rhythmical  mouvements  the  child  likes  the  most  such 
as  swaying  together,  rocking  together  etc.  By  moving  mutually 
"co-actively"  (van  Dijk,  1965*   1968),  we  try  to  develop  signal 
behavior  in  the  child.  See  if  we  can  evoke    even  the  s^mallest 
signal  in  the  child  by  which  he  expresses  his  joy  to  continue- 
the  movements. 
By  applying  conditioning    techniques  we  try  to  expend  the  movement: 
into  series   in  order  to  train  anticipation  and  the  sequential 
motoric  memory  as  much  as  possible.  Children  who  are  usually 
able  to  remember  sequential  motoric  data  will  develop  signal 
behavior  and  are  succesful  in  the  use  of  natural  signs. 
Co-active  movements  should  be  the  base  towards  developing  to 
imitative  behavior. 

Imitation  can  be  supported  by  pictorial  representations  and 
natural  signs. 


■15- 


15. 


B)  The  imj  tating  child 

Children  who  are  able  to  imitate  have  acquired  a  more  reflective 

attitude   towards  the  outer  world.  The  world  of  "immediacy"  has 

altered. 

The  element  of  distance  -  distance  in  space  and  distance  in  time  - 

has  developed  in  these  children.  They  are  able  to  "look  at"  or 

"listen  to"  stimuli  from  the  outer  world.  Residual  vision  and  hearing 

are  now  developed  as  distance  senses. 

We  all  know  that  imitation  is  a  basic  process  of  lear'ing. 

Imitation   should  he  trained  in  many  different  ways  e.g. 

1  Symmetrical  and  a-symrnetricai  body  positions. 

2  Imitation  of  body  positions  from  persons,  from  dolls  or 
from  pictures. 

3  Imitation  of  seri&i  of  movements  with  or  without  other  objects 
such  as  a  hat,  a  bracelet   etc. 

Children  at  this  level  will  soon  be  ready  for  pictographic  conver- 
sation. Photo's,  pictures  and  drawings  are  used  to  prepare   the 
child  for  coming  everts.  They  will  be  able  to  point  to  pictures 
or  to  draw  pictures   themselves  to  express  their  needs. 
To  develop  the  right  attitude  towards  language  it  is  very  important 
to  work  according  to  the  seizing  method(  Brown  and  Bellugi,1  9&4 »  v  .Uden  , 
The  base  of  language  acquisition  is  the  exchange  of  thoughts, 
intentions  people  want  to  express. 

The  teacher  watches  the  child  very  carefully  what  he  wants 
to  express.  At  that  moment  the- teacher  gives  the  correct  language 
to  the  child  e.g.  a  sign  or  a  spoken  or    written  language  form. 
The  teacher   plays  a  double  role. She  says  or  writes  the  sentence  down 
the  child  is  wanting  to  say  in  this  situation  and  the  teacher 
gives  her  own   reaction. 


The  pictographic  conversation  will  be  the  base  for  the  spoken 
or  graphical  conversation.  (Bell  1884) 


-lb- 


16. 
C)  The  dispractive  child* 

The  lea  ruing  profile  of  the  dyspractic   child  is  characterized 

by  a  strong  memory  for  simultaneously    presented  visual  data 

and  a  weak  memory  successively  presented  data  (v.  Uden  1968, 

v.Dijk-v.Uden  1976). 

This  fact  is  very  important  for  educational  programming  and  the 

choice  of  the  communication  method.  In  case  we  could  consist 

the  oral  method  for  language  acquisition,  we  would  always  focus 

upon  the  weak  side  of  the  childis  capacities. 

The  dispractic  child  lias  problems  in  lipreading  and  speech. 

However,  by  using  the  graphical  conversation  method  we  use 

the  strong  side  of  the  dispractic  child. 

The  dialogue  between  child  and  adult  has  to  be  written  down  on 

paper  according  to  the  seizing  method  described  earlier. 

The  graphical  conversation  will  be  the  base  to  develop  reading- 
speech,  lipreading  and  auditory  training.  Especially  auditory 
training  needs  as  much  attention  as  possible. 
The  degree  of  auditory  loss  ad  the  degree  of  using  residual 
hearing  will  decide  if  the  child  will  be  able  to  communicate  orally 
or  by  f ingerspelling. 

Some  of  the  children  in  this  group  are  able  to  develop  a  reading 
level  of  the  4th  grade. 

For  mou?  detailed  educational  programming  I  refer  to  the  following 
publications  v.  Uden  1968,  van  Ilijk  1 97 ^  t  van  LiJK.   van  Uden  1976. 


-17- 


17 


Conclusion; 

According  to  our  phylosophy  earle  diagnosis,  evaluation  and 
educational  planning  for  deaf-blind  children  are  inseparable. 
if  the  maximum  potential  of  each  child  is  to  be  realized. 
But  early  diagnosis,  evaluation  and  educational  programming 
can  not  bring  the  sole  solution. 

In  order  to  be  successful  in  teaching  deaf-blind  children 
there  are  many  more  aspects  which  also  are  very  important  such 
as: 

-  good  cooperation  with  the  parents   and  siblings. 

-  continuity  and  expertise  of  the  teachers  and  houseparents . 

-  very  intensive  training  of  the  staff  especially  good  theoretical 
background  of  language  acquisition  and  specific  learning  disorder: 
of  deaf  children. 

-  school  and  residential  setting  should  be  fully  integrated  in 
order  to  garantee  the  unity  in  the  child' 3  treatment. 

-  good  dif f erentiaj.  diagnoses  of  each  child  to  find  the  strong 
side  in  his  learning  profile  and  his  individualy  needs. 

-  carefully  grouping  of  children  according  to  their  level  of  the 
functioning  and  the  communication  method  they  use. 

-  good  working  a thmo sphere  among  the  staff  and  open  communication 
with  the  board  of  directors  which  has  to  support  the  needs 

of  its  children  and  staff members. 

-  provision  of  enough  staffmembers  by  national  and  federal 
government  agencies  because  deaf-blind  children  need  very 
individualized  reaching  which  means  that  one  adult  the  child 
should  be  available  for  quite  some  hours  per  day  and  ea.cn 
day  per  week. 

iJeaf-blind  children  are  the  most  handicapped  among  us.  They 
are  the  most  dependent  human  beings.  They  cannot  speak  for 
themselves.  The  culture  of  a  country  is  measured  by  the  care 
for  handicapped  people.  The  training  course  for  teachers  of 
the  deaf  last  July  in  Rio  de  Janeiro  and  this  First  Brazilian 
Seminar  for  the 'Education  of  the  beaf-Blind  have  impressed  me 
deeply.  I  am  touched  by  the  big  concern  of  the  Brazilian  national 
and  federal  government  agencies  for  the  field  of  special. 
education.  Only  by  joined  efforts  of  authorities,  all  available 
professional  workers  and  specialists  we  can  be  successful  in 
the  very  difficult  but  most  challenging  field  of  education,  the 
education  of  deaf-blind  children. 

In  Brazil  many  deaf-blind  children  are  waiting  today  for 
adequate  training  and  education  to  improve  their  quality  of 
life  and  the  lives  of  their  parents. 


Selected  bibliography; 

BELL,  A.G.:"Upon  a  method  of  teaching  language  to  a  very  young 
congenitally  deaf  child". 
Washington  D.C.  I8O4. 

BROWN,  R.and  U.  BELLUGI: 

"Three  processes  in  the  child's  acquisition  of  syntax". 
Harvard  educational  Review  34  >  1 9^4  p.131~151. 

CENTERS  and  Services  for  Leaf-blind  Children. 
Proposed  Rules,  Part  121c.  37. 
Federal  Register,  Volume  38,  Number  196,  October  11,1973. 

CHESS,  S.,  S.  KORN,  P.  FERNANDEZ: 

"Psychiatric  disorders  of  Children  with  congenital 
Rubella". 
New  York  1971 . 

CURTIS,  S.  and  E.  DONLON: 

"  The  development  and  evaluation  of  a  video-tape 
protocal  for  the  examination  of  mult ihandicapped 
deaf-blind  children". 

Syracuse  University,  Syracuse,  New  York  Final  Report 
1972. 

DANTONA,  R.: 

"Demographic  data  arid  status  of  services  for  deaf-blind 
children  in  the  United  States". 

in  "1900  is  NOV/",  edited  by  C.  SHERRICK,  John  Tracy 
Clinic,  Los  Angelos,  1974* 

DIJK,  J.  van: 

"The  first  steps  of  the  deaf-blind  child  towards 
language",  in  "Teaching  deaf-blind  children", 
Kalundborg,  Denmark  19&5« 

DIJK,  J.  van: 

"The  non-verbal  deaf-blind  child  and  his  world.  His 
ougrowth  toward  the  world  of  symbols",  in  Verzamelde 
Studies,  Instituut  voor  Dover,  St .Michielsgestel  1968. 

DIJK,  J.  van: 

"/Learning  difficulties  and  deaf-blind  children"  in 
Fourth  international  conference  on  the  education 
of  deaf-blind  children. 

Perkins  Scriool  for  the  Blind,  Watertown,  Mass. U.S. A. 
1971. 

DIJK,  J.  van  and  A.  van  Uden: 

"Problems  of  Communication  in  Deaf  Children". 
The  Teacher  of  the  Deaf,  March  1976. 

EV/ING,    I.R.    and    A.W.G.    EV/ING: 

"Teaching   deaf    children    to    talk",    Manchester,    1964. 


LEUW,  L.  DE: 

"Theories  into  Practice.  A  closer  look  at  the 
application  of  theories  on  language  disorders  in 
teaching  three  deaf-blind  children". 

in  Fifth  international  deaf-blind  Seminar,  Condover 
Hall,  1974. 

LEUW,  L.  DE: 

"Tapeto-retinale  degeneratie  bij  prelinguaal  dove 
kinderen" . 
Katholieke  Leergangen,  Tilburg,  1976. 

MYKLEBUST,  H.R.: 

"The  psychology  of  deafness". 
New  York  1964. 

PRICK,  J.: 

"Infantile  Autistic  behavior  and  experience:  a  new 
clinical  picture. 
Rotterdam  University  Press,  Holland, 1 971 . 

ROBBINS,  N. : 

"A  view  from  diagnostic  arid  educational  evaluation 
services  located  in  a  program  for  deaf-blind  students 
in  a  school  for  the  Blind". 
Gallandet  College,  Washington  D.C.  1975. 

ROBBINS,  N.: 

"Educational  Assessment  of  Deaf-blind  and  auditorily- 
visually  impaired  children:  a  survey". 
in  "State  of  the  Art"  edited  by  E.  LOWELL  and  C.ROUIN.  ^c\}7 

UDEN,  A.  van: 

"  Le  begrippen  doofstom,  doofstom  met  gehoorresten, 

en  slechthorend" . 

Ned.  T.S.  voor  Doof s tommenonderwi js ,  1951. 

UDEN,  A.  van: 

"Een  geluidsmethode  voor  zwaardove  kinderen". 
St.  Michielsgestel,  1952. 

UDEN,  A.  van: 

"A  world  of  language  for  deaf  children".  Part  I, 
Basic  Principles,  St .Michielsgestel  19&8. 

UDEN,  A.  van: 

"Eupraxie  en  spx^aak" 
Instituut  voor  Doven, 
Sint  Michielsgestel,  1970 

VERNON,  McCay: 

"Overview  of  Usher's  Syndromen.  Congenital  deafness 
and  progressive  loss  of  vision". 
The  Volta  Review,  February,  1974- 


SEMINARIO  BRASILEIRO  DE  EDUCAQAO  DE  DEFICIENTE  AUDIOVISUAL 


"REHABILITATION  AND  HABILITATION 

OF  THE  DEAF-BLIND  PERSONS  IN  THE 

FEDERAL  REPUBLIC  OF  GERMANY. 


DR.  KARL  -  HEINZ  BAASKE 


I  SEDAV  -  ABEDEV 


"Rehabilitation  and  Habilitation  of  the  ,    af-Blind 
Persons  in  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany". 

Deaf-fft-ind  persons  belong  to  those  people,  who  are  bit  the 
hardest.  They  lack  seeing  and  hearing.  The  absence  of  these  two 
most  important  senses  leads  to  an  inner  isolation  and  often  to  a 
deviating  development  of  the  personality,  experiencing  is  slowed 
down  decisively,  mental  and  psychic  growth  is  hindered,  and 
communication  is  limited.  The  lack  "of  seeing  and  hearing  is  not 
a  sum  of  both  factors,  but  presents' its  own  form  of  disability. 

Often  mental  and  psychic  illnesses  appear  additionally  as 
primary  or  secondary  symntoras. 

The  conceptual  world  of  the  deaf-blind  person  based  on  his 
senses  is  quantitatively  as  well  as  qualitatively  different  to 
the  conceptual  world  of  the  person's  who  can  se^  and  be^r.  T'he 
sociological  development  is  considerably  reduced  through  an 
isolation  which  can  hardly  be  imagined. 

Persons  who  are  born  deaf-blind  remain  mute,  unless  ve^ 
specific  attention  is  given  to  them;  mute  even  in  regard  to  sxptl 
language  and  body  language.  They  lack  any  form  of   language 
communication  with  their  seeing  and  hearing  surrounding.  They 
lack  the  ability  to  use  words  in  order  to  take  pprt  in  the 
intellectual  life  of  man. 

Those  persons  who  were  born  deaf  and  blind  oanncbt  move 
around  and  imitate  the  behaviour  of  the  people  around  teem,  because, 
due  to  the  absence  of  optical  perception  thetf  do  not  possess 
the  stimuli. 

All  this  knov/ledge  must  not  discourage  us,  but  encourage  us 
to  achieve  the  best  that  is  possible  through  goal  oriented 
rehabilitation.  It  is  our  task  to  bring  about  health,  educational, 
professional,  social,  sociological,  and  personal  rehabilitation 
and  to  integrate  the  deaf-blind  persons  in  'our  country. 

We  have  to  take  into  account  that- the  visual  and  auditive 
damages  of  our  deaf-blind  oersons  may  involve  various  combinations. 
Besides  the  kind  and  the  degree  of  the  deprivations  of  the  senses 
also  the  initial  stage  of  the  damage  to  the  e/aes  and  ears  i s  of 
utmost  importance  in  order  to  take  the  correct  measures  for 


furthering  the  deaf-blind.  This'  results  in  many  different  patterns 
so  that  measures  for  rehabilitation  can  only  he  effective  if 
they  are  geared  seperately  to  each  individual. 

Measures  are  possible  via  remaining  seeing  and  hearing 
capabilities  and  via  haptic,  tactile,  vibratory:,  and 
kinasthetical  modalities. 

The  first  initiatives  to  help  the  deaf-blind  children  also 
in  Europe  were  taken  only  after  the  successful  education  of 
Laura  Bridp'eman  »nd  helen  Keller  before  the  turn  of  the  century. 
In  Germany  the  first  deaf-blind  child  was  accepted  in  1887  by  #>e 
director  of  the  Oberlinhaus. Chaplain  Foppe . in  Potsdam  Babel  sbere: 
and  was  educated  by  a  teacher  for  deaf-blind  children  Gustav 
Pi emann. "Around  the  turn  of  the  century  an  institution  for 
deaf-blind  persons  was  created  there. 

In  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  the  deaf-blind  persons 
did  not  receive  any  specific  attention  at  first.  A  few  attempts 
to  provide  housing-  for  them  in  Stuttgart  and.  Heidelberg  did.  not 
succeed.  As  of  1950  I  have  again  and  again,  called  attention  to 
the  fact  that  the  deaf-blind  children  in  our  country  also  have 
to  be  given  the  chance  for  an  education.  But  only  fen  years  ag*o 
I  received  the  mission  to  create  a  department  for  deaf-blind 
students  within  the  School  for  the  Blind  in  Hannover,  however, 
after  our  first  efforts  it  became  clear  that  we  could  not  do 
justice  to  the  differentiating  assignments  of  rehabilitation  and. 
habilifation  of  the  deaf-blind  persons  in  the  framework  of  a 
small,  annexed  department.  The  number  of  children  who  were 
waiting  in  line  to  be  registered  for  school  grew  from  year  to 
year,  even  from  month  to  month.  The  call  of  more  than  S00  deaf- 
blind  adults  for  a  central,  nation-w^-ide  rehabilitation  center 
became  louder  and  louder.  Therefore  I  developped  the  plan  for  an 
all-inclusive  educational  home,  for  a  center  for  deaf-blind 
persons.  For  this  center  1  needed  a  sponsor.  The  Chairman  of  the 
Bi.indenverband  Niedersachsen  (Organization  of  the  Blind  of 
Bower  Saxony)  accepted  this  responsibil ity.  He  founded  the 
non-profit  organization  "Deutsches  Taubblindenwerk"  and  he 
raised  from  nublic  and  private  sources  the  funds  for  the  building 
of  the  Center  f or/yDeaf-blind. 

In  this  Center  for  the  Deaf-blind  we  initiate  all  steps 
and  carrv  out  all  measures  which  are  necessary  and  attainable 


-r  3 


for  the  rehabilitation  of  deaf-blind  children  and  adults. 

These  tasks  are:* 

1.  Locating  the  children  and  adults. 

2.  Counselling  of  parents  and  families. 

J).  Early  care  for  children  below  school  age  and  able  to  attend 
school . 

4.  Education  of  students  in  schools. 

5.  Vocational  training  of  teen-agers. 

6.  Professional  integration. 

7.  Rehabilitation  and  continuing-  education  of   adults. 

8.  Representation  of  deaf-blind  persons  in  all  areas. 

From  the  beginning,  these  goals  were  too  high  for  the 
Center  £or  the  Deaf-blind;  we  could  not  reach  back  to  workable 
lesson  plans  for  curriculum  planning,  we  did  not  have  a 
sufficiently  well  trained  staff  for  our  educational  work,  we 
had  to  reduce  considerable  retardations  in  our  visually  and 
auditively  handicapped  children.  But  ,.we  succeeded  to  increase  the 
number  of  students  since  September  1971  by  the  factor  5,   and 
we  succeeded  to  visit  continuously  additional  150  deaf-blind 
children  in  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany  and  to  counsel  their 
parents  in  ten  "Mother-Child-Courses"  at  home. 

Deaf-blind  persons  are  reported  to  us  by  parents  and  doctors, 
schools  for  the  blind  and  schools  for  the  deaf,  offices  of 
education,  welfare  offices,  and  by  organisations  for  the  blind 
and  deaf.  No  obligatory  reporting  of  handicapped  children  is 
required  in  the  Federal  Republic  of  Germany. 

JX$   September  20,  197?  the  Deutsche  Taubblindenzentrum 
(German  Center  for  the  Deaf-blind)  was  inaugurated  as  a  nation- 
wide and  central  educational  center  andfhome  for  deaf-blind  persons. 
The  accredited  private  school  for  the  deaf-blind  was  founded 
as  Special  Education  School  already  one  year  earlier,  when  the 
first  deaf-blind  children  from  the  NiedersachsLsche  Landesblinden- 
schuleHannover  (State  School  for  the  Blind  of  Lower  Saxony  in 
Hannover)  moved  into  the  Center  for  the  Deaf-blind. 

A  subject  matter  specialist  is  in  charge  of  pre-school 
education. 


We  offer  counselling  as  a  first  aid  to  parents  of  deaf-blind 
children  in  their  own  home.  The  earlier  we  start  this,  the 
greater  is  the  chance  to  be  able  to  help  the  deaf-blind  child. 
This  counselling  takes  place  in  cooperation  with  medical  doctors 
(specialists).  In  courses  for  parents  they  receive  further 
suggestions  in  the  Center  for  earing  for  their  children,  dnri^0* 
the  pre-sohool  stage. 

Our  accredited  School  for  the  Deaf-blind  is  the  nucleus  of 
the  Center  for  the  "Deaf-blind.  Here  we  trtf  to  communicate  to  the 
school-  age  children  a  feeline*  for  our  three-dimensional  won"1  d 
and  to  at  act  to  this  at  the  same  time  the  language  in  form  of 
sound',  writing  and  feeling.  Besides  we  tra  to  develop  the  physical 
mental.,  and  psychological  growth  of  the  students  according  to 
their  different  talents  and  we  tra  to  teach  them  practical  skills 
and  give  them  room  for  experiencing. 

*  Tn  our  instruction  the  following  principles  are  valid: 

We  have  to  protect  t"e  deaf-blind  child  from  inner  and 
outer  suffering. 

We  have  to  activate  and  develop  all  remaining  senses  of 
the  deaf-blind  child  in  all  aneas. 

We  have  to  reduce  all  behavioural  and  developmental 
disturbances  of  cfeaf-blind  children. 

IV e  have  to  familiarize  the  deaf-blind  child  with  all  means 
of  communication  for  the  deaf-blind  and/the  technical  aids  for 
the  blind. 

The  education  and  training  of  our  student--  has  to  result 
in  the  possibility  to  carry  out  a  profession  w-i  ich  aereps  with 
them.  Work  can  give  to  the  deaf-blind  person  a  feeling  of  self- 
assurance  and  in  some  cases  economic  independence. 

After  the  inauguration'  of.  the  Center  f>r  the  Deaf -blind 
we  had  first  attempted  to  train  youne'  industrial  workers.  This 
attempt  failed  because  of  two  reasons: 

U  The  first  5  teen-agers  were  not  able  to  fulfill  the 
demands  of  an  industrial  w  -orker  and 

?.    The  economic  situation  had  deteriorated  to  such  an  extent 
that  we  could  not  place  our  deaf-blind,  students  in  industry. 

This  fact  does  not  release  us  from  the  obligation-  to  gi  ve 
all  deaf-blind  persons  a  vocational  or  professional  training. 
Only,  satisfying  professional  work  can  give  the  deaf-blind  persons 


-  5  - 

self-assurance  and  for  some  of  them  even  economic  ind  en  end  ence. 
As  occupation  for-  most  of  the  deaf-blind  persons  certain  crafts 
for  the  blind  are  available.  (Weaving,  macrame,  wicker-work, 
brusb  making).  Since  1975  our  deaf-blind  are  mainly  trained  in 
these  occupations  in  our  training  workshops.  The  deaf-blind 
person  can  later  practice  these  acouired  skills  in  workshops  for 
the  blind  or  at  home.  When  skills  and  abilities  above  averse  can 
be  recognised  we  are  trying,  naturally,  to  make  additional 
professional  goals  possible. 

We  agree  that  we  could  steroup  our  students  according  to 
c-ertain  criteria,  for  instance  according  to  the  same  kind  of 
^a^iiicFp  or  the  same  achievement  group  or  a°e  group.  We  deci.ded 
to  have  family  tyre  groupings,  where  each  group  is  guided  by 
one  teacher  and  four  persons  with  a  background  in  pedagogical 
and  social  science.  This  team  has  proven  to  be  effective  for  the 
instruction  of  deaf-blind  students.  It  presupposes  constant 
communication,  togetherness  and.  a  high  degree  of  human  and 
professional  Qualities.  In  order  to  improve  the  content  of 
instruction  at  our  school  with  the  differently,  talented  and 
differently  handicapped  children,  curriculum  research  is  done  in 
cooperation  with  resoective  university  professors  of  the 
University  Hamburg. 

We  have  in  our  Center  rehabilitation  facilities  for  those 
blind  persons   who  became  deaf  as  adults,  or  those  deaf  persons 
who  became  blind  as  adults,  or  those  who  lost  both  senses  when 
they  were  adults.  We  try  to  give  constantly  new  information  and 
knowlet'e  to  some  deaf-blind  adults.  But  in  the  Center  for  the 
Deaf-blind  we  naturally  limit  ourself  essentially  to  pre-school, 
school,  professional  and  social  rehabilitation.  However,  it  has 
to  be  nointed  out  that  we  cannot  do  our  work  without  medical 
rehabilitation.  It  is  directed  towards  functional  improvement, 
corrective  surgical  operations,  treatment  with  medicine,  and 
occupational  therapy,  physical  therapy,  or  the  supply  of  learning 
aids.  We  carry  out  this  medical  rehabilitation  in  cooperation 
with  the  neighboring  School  of  Medicine  (University). 

The  work  with  our  deaf-blind  adults  in  residence  is  quite 
different  than  the  daily  teaching,  because  we  try  to  create 
a  homekt  our  Center  for  those  deaf -blind  adults,  who  did  not  find 
a  home  anywhere  alse  upto  now.  They  had  to  give  up  their  friends 
and  their  familiar  surroundings  at  many  places.  Therefore  we 


-  6  - 

have  developped  sponsorships  for  them  with  our  church  community. 
Almost  half  of  our  deaf-blind  persons  are  employed  in  the 
neighboring  workshop  for  the  blind  in  crafts  for  the  blind. 
Others  are  knitting  or  "tyey  produce  artistic  wicker  work  at 
home.  Letters  are  folded  and  put  into  envelopes,  and  commissions 
from  industries  in  the  city  of  Hannover  are  carried  out. 
There  is  an  extended  program  to  fill  the  leisure  time  of  our 
deaf-blind.  It  includes  all  areas  that  are  attainable  for  deaf- 
blind  persons.  Swimmine-  and  sports,  cooking  and  crafts,  reading 
Hand  games,  hiking  and  sightseeing,  celebrating  and  prayers.  In 
a  cafeteria  managed  by  our  Center  items  for  daily  needs  are  for 
sale. 

The  building  of  our  Center  for  the  "Deaf-blind  has  been 
designed  such  that  the  whole  ground  floor  is  on  the  same  level 
and  the  individual  wings  are  arranged  very  functionally  with 
each  other. 

It    is    diA/idpd    in    5   building   parts    : 

a)  8  pavilions  with  classrooms  and  living  quarters  for  male 
and  f ea^l e  students. 

b)  Entrance  Fall,  administration,  subject  matter  classrooms 

and  counselling  rooms. 

0)  Training  workshops,  vocational  school,  living  quarters  for 
ex. 

^d.ults  in  residence,  and  pre-school  nursery. 

D)  living  quarters  with  apartments  for  deaf-blind  youth  and 
adults . 

E)  Gymnasium  and  swimming-  pool,  bowling  alley,  arid  rhythm  room. 

We  have  adjusted  our  Center  to  the  needs  of  the  deaf-blind 
also  from  a  technical  point  of  view.  Railings  have  been  installed 
in  and  around,  the  Center  for  better  orientati/n.  A  vibration 
ledge  in  front  of  the  elevator  indicates  the  opening  of  the 
elevator  door.  Several  vibration  buttons  are  arranged  within  the 
elevator  and  indicate  on  which  floor  the  elevator  stops.  Rotatinp- 
fans  replace  thepell  in  the  rooms.  In  every  apartment  are  a 
number  of  electrical  outlets  to  which  additional  electrical 
equipments  can  be  connected  and  also  the  Braillomat,  a  communication 
machine  for  the  deaf-blind.  Every  deaf-blind  person  can  control 
from  his  bed  an  alarm  signal  for  emergencies.  Amplifiers  and 
induction  bands  (wireless  amplifiers)  for  increasing  the  volume 
of  the  sound  are  in  the  pavilions,  in  the  gymnasium  and  rhythm 
fcoom. 


-  7  - 

For  accreditation  and  approval  or   our  school  v/e  had  to 
submit/a  general  draft  for  our  program  of  instruction.  This  draft 
could  onle  be  a  guideline  for  the  daily  work  with  our  so 
differently  talented  and  handicapped  children  and  does  not 
suffice  on  the  long  run  for  comprehensive  educational  work. 
Due  to  the  suggestion  of  the  Niedersachsische  Kultusministerium 
(Ministry  of   Culture  of  Lower  Saxony)  v/e  therefore  enriched  tine 
content  of  instruction  at  our  school  through  curriculum  research 
in  cooperation  with  the  respective  University  professors  of  the 
University  Hamburg.  In  order  to  perform  the  instruction  at  the 
school  more  effectively  the  following  committees  have  to  work 
out  new  projects: 

1.  Committee  "Snorts" 

2.  Committee  "Natural  Science" 

3.  Committee  "Pre-school  and  Early  Education" 

4.  Committee   "Religious  Festivities" 

5.  Committee  "Special  Edration  Courses"  (For  children  who  need 

specific  additional  help) 

6.  Committee  "Manual  work  in  Education" 

The  School  has  world-wide  contacts  with  institutions  which 
educate  deaf-blind  children  just  as  we  do.  Representatives  of 
these  schools  attended  the  following  international  conferences 
or  seminars: 

•1971  US,  1972  Holland,  1973  Austria,  1974-  England, 
1975  Holland,  1976  Australia. 

The  Deutsche  Taubblindenva?k  is  in  charge  of  the  next 
world  conference  for  the  education  of  the  deaf-blind  in  1980 
in  H^annover.  We  know  with  what  kind  of  expectations  the  parents, 
teachers  and  educators  of  deaf-blind  children  will  come  to 
Hannover.  V/e  therefore  want  to  show  them  how  hard  we  try  to 
further  the  rteaf-blind  child  in  thelbest  possible  way. 


Karl-Heinz  Baaske 

Deutsches  Taubblinden-Zentrum 

Albert-Schweitzer-Hof  27 

3000  Hannover  71 


Karl-He inz  B  a  a  s  k  e 
born  1921, 

Studies  at  the  University  of  Hamburg  (pedagogics,  pedagogics  for 
the  deaf  and  blind,  phonetics,  science  of  language,  psychology, 
otology,  ophtalinology). 

From  1952  on  teacher  for  the  deaf  and  blind  and  the  deaf -blind, 

Prom  1965-1971  Dorectpr  pf  the  Deaf-Blind  Department  of  the 
School  for  the  Blind  of  Lower  Saxony  in  Hanover 

Initiator  of  an  educational  program  for  deaf-blind  children  of 
the  De feral  Republic  of  Germany. 

Since  1971  Director  of  the  School  for  the  Deaf-Blind  as  well  as 
of  the  G-erman  Deaf -Blind  Center  in  Hanover. 

Vice-Director  of  the  G-erman  Deaf-Blind  Association  gGmbH 
(Deutsches  Taubblindenwerk  g.GmbH), 

Vice-chairman  of  the  I.A.D.D.B. , 

Board  Member  of  the  G-erman  Association  for  the  Rehabilitation 
of  the  Handicapped  (Deutsche  Vereinigung  fur  die  Rehabilitation 
Behinderter), 

Adviser  to  the  Serman  Parity  Welfare  Association  (Deutscher 
1 aritatischer  Wohlf ahrts-Verband ) ♦ 

**    **   **   ** 


<y** 


Centers  and  Services  for  Deaf-Blind  Children  in 
the  United  States?   Their  Organization  and  Operation 

fey 

Robert  Dantona 
Coordinator,  Centers  and  Services  for  Dea-Blind  Children 
Bureau  of  Education  for  the  Handicapped,  U.S.  Office  of  Education 


The  devesting  and  catastrophic  force  of  maternal  rubella  is  well 
known  throughout  the  world.   Rubella  epidemics  in  Australia,  the 
United  Kingdom  and  the  United  States  has  resulted  in  countless 
thousands  of  children  horn  with  handicapping  conditions  and  numer- 
ous infant  deaths  due  to  miscarriages  and  stillbirths. 

In  the  United  States,  the  savage  force  of  the  1964-65  rubella 
epidemic  afflicted  an  estimated  50,000  women  during  their  early 
months  of  pregnancy.   Some  20,000  of  these  pregnancies  resulted  in 
miscarriages  or  stillbirths,  and  30,000  resulted  in  children  born 
with  one  or  more  handicaps.   These  handicaps   included  visual 
impairments,  hearing  impairments,  mental  retardation,  and  a 
variety  of  other  physical  disabilities. 

Many  of  these  children  v/ere  born  with  two  or  more  of  these 
disabilities.  The  Center  for  Disease  Control  in  Atlanta,  Georgia, 
had  predicted  that  some  2,500  children  would  be  born  deaf -blind  as 
a  result  of  this  epidemic  and  that  the  total  economic  cost  for  the 
education  and  institutionalization  of  these  children  would  be  over 
37  million  dollars  per  year. 

Prior  to  the  rubella  epidemic  there  was  an  estimated  600  deaf -blind 
children  of  school  age  in  the  United  States.   Of  this  number, 
approximately  100  children  were  enrolled  in  deaf -blind  programs  in 
seven  residential  facilities  scattered  throughout  the  country.  Be- 
cause combined  deafness  and  blindness  has  occurred  so  rarely 
before  1963,  very  few  educational  services  were  available  at  the 
time  of  the  epidemic.   The  significant  increase  in  the  deaf -blind 
population  anticipated  as  a  result  of  the  rubella  epidemic  and  the 
awareness  that  rubella  was  not  the  only  contributing  factor  to  the 
combined  loss  of  vision  and  hearing  in  children,  created  great 

/. 


-  2  - 
concern  to  educators,  administrators,  and  government  officials  in 
the  United  States, 

Other  contributing  factors  toward  the  increase  of  the  number  of 
children  with  multiple  birth  defects  evidenced  over  the  past  ten 
years,  are  infectious  diseases  such  as  encephalitis  and  meningitis 
genetic  anomalies,  congenital  debilities  and  malformations  irradia- 
tion, and  the  improper  use  of  drugs  during  pregnancy.   Ironically, 
the  advances  of  medical  science  have  also  contributed  to  this 
increase  of  multiple  birth  defects  by  reducing  the  infant  mortality 
rate  and  extending  life  by  greater  control  of  those  infections  and 
diseases  which  in  the  past  killed  many  children. 

The  degree  of  impairment  suffered  by  deaf -blind  children  ranges 
from  profoundly  deaf  and  blind,  to  hard  of  hearing  and  partially 
sighted.   To  further  compound  the  problems,  these  children  often 
may  have  a  high  proportion  of  other  physical  and/or  mental  disabili- 
ties.  Because  of  the  severe  probleras  resulting  from  these 
multiple  disabilities  and  the  overwhelming  communication  problems 
that  resulted,  the  deaf -blind  child  required  specialized  education 
as  well  as  training  programs  to  meet  their  unique  needs.   Such 
severely  miltiple  handicapped  children  cannot  be  accommodated  in 
special  educational  classes  developed  solely  for  the  hearing  handi- 
capped or  visually  handicapped  child, 

It  was  estimated  by  Federal  Government  officials  that  in  addition 
to  the  2500  deaf -blind  children  predicted  as  a  result  of  the  rubella 
epidemic,  that  another  2  500  deaf -blind  children  would  be  found 
throughout  the  Ration  resulting  from  other  causes.   It  was  evident 
that  these  5000  children  could  not  be  served  by  the  limited  number 
of  deaf -blind  programs  available  in  1963.   In  fact,  it  was  estimated 
that  if  existing  facilities  for  the  deaf -blind  wore  expanded  to  their 
maximum  capacity,  they  would  be  able  to  enroll  fewer  than  450  of 
these  children  by  1972, 

The  increase  in  the  deaf-blind  population,  especially  the  antici- 
pated rubella  group  as  they  reached  school  age  in  1970-71,  would 
place  a  tremendous  burden  on  prevailing  educational  programs  leaving 

/. 


-  3  - 

thousands  of  these  children  without  appropriate  educational  services, 
The  impending  educational  crisis  was  further  aggravated  by  the  lack 
of  trained  professionals  available-teachers,  aides,  ans  support 
personnel  to  •tuff  the  special  programs  needed  for  these  children. 
Because  of  this  lack  of  specialized  facilities  and  professional 
staff  it  seemed  inevitable  that  many  of  these  children  would  be 
inappropriately  referred  to  state  institutions  for  the  retarded 
and  thus  be  given  inadequate  educational  services. 

Only  a  handful  of  educators  and  administrators  involved  with  the 
education  of  deaf -blind  children  aware  of  the  impending  rubella 
epidemic  urged  and  pleaded  in  early  1964  for  prompt  action  and 
intervention  by  the  Federal  Government  to  prevent  the  predicted 
educational  crisis  awaiting  these  children  and  their  families. 
These  deaf -blind  children,  like  all  children  were  entitled  to  the 
same  opportunity  to  develop  to  their  maximum  capabilities.   The 
longer  such  a  severely  handicapped  ~hild  goes  without  meaningful 
educational  intervention,  the  more  certain  it  is  the  child's 
potential  will  be  reduced  and  the  need  for  institutionalization 
increased. 

Since  existing  programs  and  facilities  would  not  be  able  to  handle 
the  educational  needs  of  the  vastly  increased  numbers  of  deaf- 
blind  children  and  because  of  their  scattered  geographic 
distribution  throughout  the  United  States,  it  was  essential  that 
all  resources  available  be  coordinated  and  work  cooperatively  at  all 
levels  -  State,  local,  and  Federal  to  deal  with  this  catastrophic 
problem.   A  national  effort  would  be  essential  and  support  from 
the  Federal  Government  would  be  necessary  to  create  the  new 
resources  required  to  meet  the  special  needs  of  these  children. 

In  the  mid  1960's  educators,  parents,  professionals,  and  concerned 
lay  people  appealed  to  the  United  States  Congress  for  assistance 
for  these  children.  Thanks  to  their  endless  efforts  and  to  a 
s,  mpathetic  and  responsible  Congress  Public  Law  90-247,  Part  C, 
amending  Title  VI  of  the  Elementary  P'  Secondary  Education  Act, 
was  approved  and  signed  into  law  by  P.  ssident  Johnson  in  January 
of  1968.   This  law  provided  for  the  establishment  of  centers  and 

/. 


and  services  for  all  deaf -"blind  children  in  the  United  States,  with 
a  million  dollars  "being  appropriated  for  this  purpose  in  1969.  On 
April  13',  1970,  this  law  was  amended  "by  Public  Law  91-230,  Part  C, 
Section  622,  Title  VI  of  the  Education  of  the  Handicapped  Act, 

The  intent  of  Congress  was  to  provide  model  centers  through  this 
law  " ...  designed  to  develop  and  "bring  to  hear  upon  such  children, 
"beginning  as  early  as  feasible  in  life,  those  specialised  profes- 
sional and  allied  services,  methods,  and  aids  that  are  found  to  "be 
most  effective  to  enable  the  children  to  achieve  their  fall  potent- 
ial for  communication  with,  and  adjustment  to,  the  world  around 
them  for  useful  and  meaningful  participation  in  society  and  for 
self  fulfillment." 

The  Bureau  of  Education  for  the  Handicapped  is  the  Federal  Agency 
responsible  for  managing  and  implementing  the  deaf -blind  program. 
The  Bureau's  goal  was  to  establish  ten  Regional  Centers.   This 
program  would  include  all  50  states  and  the  Trust  Territories.  The 
regional  centers  would  be  established  at,  or  as  near  as  possible, 
to  the  existing  programs  for  deaf -blind  children  around  the  United 
States  in  an  effort  to  maximize  the  use  of  these  limited  resources 
as  well  as  their  expertise  so  that  increased  benefits  to  new  and 
developing  programs  would  result.   The  regional  areas  were  establish- 
ed on  the  basis  of  the  State's  willingness  to  become  involved  and 
to  work  cooperatively  with  other  States  while  gradually  developing 
their  own  programs  for  deaf -blind  children. 

In  June  of  1969,  eight  regional  centers  were  funded  with  one  million 
dollars  by  the  Bureau  of  Education  for  the  Handicapped.   The  eight 
agencies  funded  to  operate  these  centers  included  four  schools  with 
established  programs  for  deaf -blind  children,  t  iree  State  Education 
Agencies  which  had  established  programs  for  deaf -blind  children  in 
their  State,  and  a  private  agency  which  had  in  operation  a  model 
program  for  deaf  children.   In  June  of  1970,  two  additional  regional 
centers  were  funded  by  the  Bureau.   Of  these,  two,  one  was  a  State 
Education  Agency  which  had  no  established  program  for  deaf -blind 
children  and  the  other  was  a  State  Department  of  Public  Welfare 
which  had  an  established  program  for  deaf -blind  children. 

/. 


The  ten  agencies  funded  to  develop  and  operate  regional  centers 
for  deaf -blind  children  were  selected  on  the  basis  of  their 
demonstrated  interest  in  and  their  ability  to  implement  the 
Bureau's  program.   The  amount  of  funding  received  by  each  region 
depended  upon  the  number  of  deaf -blind  children  who  could  be 
provided  immediate  services  in  that  geographical  area.   Federal 
appropriations  have  increased  each  year  from  one  million  dollars 
in  1969  to  sixteen  million  dollars  in  1977. 

The  regional  center  concept  is  based  on  the  administration,  organi- 
zation, and  coordination  of  existing  resources  and  the  development 
of  additional  resources  as  needed  t/;  specialized  center  staff,  to 
assure  that  diagnostic  and  educational  services  are  provided  for 
deaf -blind  children  in  their  regionc   Those  states  uniting 
together  into  one  region  designated  a  sponsoring  agency  to  serve 
as  the  coordinating  unit  responsible  for  implementing  the  regional 
center  programs.   To  achieve  greater  effectiveness  per  dollar 
expended,  the  emphasis  in  all  centers  is  on  direct  services  to 
children  in  the  belief  that  individual  services  and  specific 
programs  will  increase  the  deaf -blind  child's  potential  for 
independence  and  thus  reduce  the  total  expenditures  over  that 
person's  lifetime. 

The  initial  efforts  of  the  regional  centers  required  no  construct- 
ion of  new  facilities  with  Federal  monies  but  this  does  not  pre- 
clude the  possibility  that  special  facilities  may  someday  have  to  be 
built  to  meet  the  exceptional  needs  of  this  group  -  especially  as 
they  approach  young  adulthood.   Building  plans  must  be  considered 
by  each  State  as  they  plan  for  the  total  service  needs  of  the 
deaf -blind  individual.   However,  the  initial  emphasis  of  the 
centers  focussed  on  their  ability  to  provide  adequate  educational 
services  for  these  children  as  quickly  as  possible  in  order  to 
reduce  the  possibilities  of  these  children  being  institutionalized. 

Each  regional  center  has  a  coordinating  staff  responsible  for 
administering  the  center's  regional  plan  e:-&   program  as  approved 
by  the  Bureau.   Under  contract  agreements  with  participating 


educational  or  institutional  programs,  the  centers  make  certain 
that  comprehensive  diagnostic  and  evaluative  services  are  provided; 
"iat  there  are  programs  for  the  adjustment,  orientation,  and 
education  of  all  deaf -blind  children  and  that  in  these  programs  all 
necessary  professional  and  allied  services  are  integrated;  and, 
that  effective  consultative  services  are  provided  for  parents, 
teachers,  and  others  who  have  direct  roles  in  deaf-blind  children's 
lives  * 

In  order  to  identify  and  meet  the  full  range  of  special  needs  of 
the  children  and  their  parents,  the  centers  are  also  involved  in 
research,  the  development  or  demonstration  of  new  educational 
programs,  inservics  training  for  parents  and  professional  and 
allied  personnel,  and  the  dissemination  of  materials  and  information 
about  practices  found  effective  in  working  with  deaf-blind  children. 

Since  the  start  of  the  program  ir  1969,  the  ten  regional  deaf- 
blind  centers  have  carried  out  intensive  casefinding  efforts  in 
order  to  identify  and  locate  all  deaf -blind  children  in  each  region. 
Each  State  within  a  region  has  established  procedures  for  locating 
these  children  and  for  obtaining  specific  information  for  planning 
the  most  appropriate  services  and  for  ensuring  efficient  use  of 
available  resources.   This  information  is  reported  to  the  regional 
center  and  organized  by  the  center  staff  for  region  wide  planning 
of  services  to  these  children  and  their  families. 

tfhen  a  child  is  located,  arrangements  are  made  by  the  center  staff 
to  provide  diagnostic  and  evaluative  services  by  agencies  partici- 
pating in  this  program.   Lata  on  the  child's  degree  of  hearing  and 
vision  impairment,  degree  oi  functional  sensory  ability,  and  degree 
of  additional  handicaps  must  be  obtained  and  assessed  to  provide 
an  adequate  program  for  the  child's  individual  needs.   The  goal 
in  all  cases  is  to  determine  each  child's  capacity  for  growth  and 
development,,   Upon  completion  of  diagnostic  and  evaluative  services, 
children  are  placed  in  a  variety  of  educational  or  training  programs, 
including  residential  schools,  training  institutions,  tutorial 

/. 


-  7  - 
■programs,    public  school  classes,  and  preschool  programs.   The 
objective  is  to  provide  an  individualized  educational  program 
designed  to  meet  the  specific  needs  of  each  child. 

The  centers  also  provide  techn:  jal  assistance  directly  to  the 
State  Education  Agencies  through  their  own  staff  or  through 
consultants  in  order  to  develop  State  plans  which  will  assure  the 
provision  of  meaningful  and  continuous  services  through  the 
educational  lifetime  of  the  deaf-blind  child.   The  centers  also 
conduct  inservice  training  for  parents,  teachers,  aides,  and 
others  working  with  deaf -blind  children  on  a  continuing  basis  at 
the  local  service  program  level,  and  state  or  regional  levels. 
Inservice  training  is  a  critical  program  activity  carried  out  oy 
the  Centers  in  an  effort  to  supplement  the  skills  of  teachers  and 
aides  so  they  could  more  meaningfully  and  productively  work  with 
deaf -blind  children.   Because  the  number  of  programs  for  deaf- 
blind  children  have  expanded  faster  than  professionals  could  be 
trained,  continuous  training  of  professionals  is  essential. 

Since  1969?  the  ten  regional  have  located  and  identified  some 
5,600  deaf -blind  children.   These  children  are  to  be  found  in  all 
50  States  and  the  Territories.   In  1974,  some  4,478  children  are 
receiving  direct  educational  services  in  more  than  250  programs 
around  the  United  States.   Today,  each  State  has  one  or  more 
programs  for  deaf -blind  children  compared  to  only  seven  programs 
available  for  these  children  in  1968.   The  goal  of  the  deaf-blind 
program  is  to  provide  all  deaf -blind  children  who  can  benefit 
from  them,  appropriate  educational  services  by  1978. 

Nearly  13  years  have  passed  since  tie  rubella  epidemic.   We  are 
now  .able  to  measure  some  of  the  consequences  and  evaluate  how  the 
regional  center  concept  has  worked  in  response  to  the  severe 
educational  crisis  created  by  this  epidemic.   This  crisis  was  not 
the  epidemic,  for,  as  we  have  learned  since  that  time  nearly  half 
the  deaf-blind  children  located  by  the  centers  were  a  result  of 
other  causes.   The  crisis  was  the  lack  of  available  facilities  as 
well  as  the  manpower  with  essential  expertise  in  the  areas  of 

/. 


education,  medical  diagnosis,  and  educational  assessment.   These 
skills  are  critical  and  "basic  for  planning  appropriate  educational 
and  training  programs  for  these  children.   Because  the  trained 
human  resources  were  not  available  at  the  critical  tine  when  they 
were  needed,  many  of  our  deaf -blind  children  are  in  institutions 
today.   Because  the  United  States  and  other  Nations  delayed  in 
developing  a  rubella  vaccine  (although  the  relationsxhip  between 
rubella  and  congenital  disabilities  was  known  since  1941)  thousands 
of  children  were  needlessly  born  with  disabilities. 

We  have  learned  that  when  an  epidemic  strikes,  leaving  a  large 
segment  of  the  population  disabled,  and  the  country  at  large  is 
without  resources  or  the  trained  manpower  to  oope,  a  regional  type 
program  is  needed.   Through  a  regional  program  effort  the  needs  of 
the  affected  population  con  be  more  readily  identified,  limited 
resources  can  be  used  more  efficiently,  and  professionals  can  be 
trained  more  rapidly  to  provide  the  services  essential  for  this 
population.   In  the  United  States,  all  States  worked  together  in 
a 'joint  partnership  with  the  Federal  G-overnment  and  the  regional 
centers  to  achieve  the  common  goal  of  delivery  services  to  these 
children  no re  quickly  than  might  have  been  possible  if  each  State 
worked  alone.   The  regional  center  concept  did  not  tear  children 
away  from  their  families  or  isolate  then.   It  developed  programs 
as  close  to  these  children  and  their  hones  as  possible. 

Through  the  cooperative  effort  fostered  by  the  regional  centers 
over  the  past  8  years,  each  State  has  been  independently 
strengthened  and  has  now  developed  its  own  resources  to  serve  their 
deaf-blind  children.   The  resources  of  each  State  will  continue  to 
be  developed  by  the  regional  centers  until  every  State  can  provide 
for  itself.   As  the  needs  of  the  States  and  the  deaf-blind 
population  they  serve  change  the  role  of  the  regional  centers  will 
alsc  develop  to  meet  new  needs. 

Increased  emphasis  by  the  Centers  will  be  placed  on  the  develop- 
ment of  prcvocational  and  vocational  programs  which  will  assure  a 
meaningful  transition  for  deaf -blind  children  fron  educational 
programs  to  rehabilitation  services.   Increased  community  based 


-  9  - 

programs  such  as  satellite  homes,  foster  hones  services,  and 

community  resicb     programs  will  he  developed  cooperatively  with 

the  States  in  an  effort  to  facilitate  the  deinstitutionalization 

process e   Basic  and  applied  research  will  he  developed  in  order 
to  assist  in  long  rang©  e&uoational  planning,   Demonstration 

models  to  validate  assessment  techniques  and  educational  methodolo- 
gies will  he   established.   And,  increased  technical  assistance 
programs  by  the  centers  will  provide  the  States  with  the  necessary 
expertise  to  assit  them  in  planning,  staff  training,  curriculum 
development,  child  assessment,  child  find,  .and  program  evaluation. 

To  meet  these  new  efforts,  a  new  State-Federal  partnership  will  he 
developed  by  mid  1978,  drawing  upon  State  and  Federal  resources  to 
achieve  a  common  goal  which  will  he  realized  by  1980s   to  provide 
a  full  continuum  of  services  which  will  assure  not  only  equal 
educational  opportunity  for  all  deaf -blind  persons 5  but  also,  their 
right  for  a  full  and  meaningful  life  in  society, 


A  Teacher -Training  Program 

for  the 

Deaf-Blind 


(Paper  for  the  First  Brazilian  Seminar 
for  the  Education  of  the  Deaf-Blind 
November  6-12,  1977) 


Crist:!  na  S.  Castro 
Principal,  Deaf -Blind  Department 
Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 
Watertown,  Massachusetts,  USA 


Cristina  S.  Castro  is  the  principal  of  the  Deaf-Blind  Department 
at  Perkins  School  for  the  Blind  in  Watertown,  Massachusetts,  U.S.A. 
She  holds  a  Masters  Degree  in  Speech  and  Hearing  from  Central  Institute 
for  the  Deaf  which  is  affiliated  with  Washington  University  in  St.  Louis, 
Missouri.   She  took  the  Perkins  Teacher-Training  Program  for  the 
Deaf-Blind  in  1960-61  and  stayed  to  teach  in  the  Deaf>Blind 
Department  until  1969.   For  two  years  after  that,  she  was  supervising 
teacher  of  the  department  until  1971  when  she  became  principal. 


A  Teacher  Training  Program 

for 

Deaf-Blind  Children 


Two  years  ago  I  was  observing  a  student  teacher  in  one  of  my  classrooms 

and  discovered  a  glaring  shortcoming  in  her  professional  preparation  as  a 

teacher  of  "academic"  deaf-blind  children.   She  was  working  on  addition  with 

a  student  and  had  given  a  worksheet  on  adding  numbers  in  the  hundredth  place. 

Example:   348    Unfortunately,  the  student  she  had  could  only  count  to  30. 
+269 

When  I  .isked  the  student  teacher  what  her  teaching  objective  was  for  the 

seatwork,  she  answered  that  it  was  just  to  see  if  the  student  could  do  it. 

She  proceeded  to  show  me  that  she  was  really  only  taking  each  column  at  a 

time  because  the  student  cannot  count  to  a  hundred  yet.   This  was  a  seriously 

misleading  procedure,  to  say  the  least,  since  the  student  was  not  learning 

appropriate  place  values  and  was  picking  up  wrong  number  concepts  from  the 

lesson.   A  teacher  does  not  skip  sequences  of  learning  even  with  a  child 

having  normal  hearing  and  vision,  or  test  the  child  on  a  concept  that  has 

not  been  previously  taught.   This  is  a  very  basic  and  realistic  principle 

of  teaching. 

What  I'm  trying  to  point  out  is  that  the  student  teacher  did  not  have 

the  necessary  general  background  for  her  student- teaching  placement.   And  while 

it  is  impossible  to  prepare  a  teacher- trainee  for  every  problem  that  might 

arise  in  the  classroom,  there  is  a  general  body  of  knowledge  about  normal 

child  development  and  curriculum  planning  that  should  be  an  integral  part  of 


teacher  training  programs.   This  type  ol  background  information  is  imperative 

1 
for  either  the  teacher  of  the  low-funct ioning  or  the  educable  group. 

I  can  cite  only  a  few  years  of  direct  involvement  in  planning,  organizing, 
and  lecturing  in  a  teacher- training  program  for  the  deaf-blind.   However,  I 
have  worked  with  the  deaf-blind  for  17  years  and  I  have  worked  with  numerous 
teachers  and  student  teachers.   I  have  often  wished  that  their  preparation  had 
included  development  of  all  the  competencies  that  would  meet  the  needs  of  the 
particular  deaf-blind  students  in  our  department.   Consequently,  I  have  begun 
Lo  develop  definite  ideas  of  what  teacher- training  programs  should  include 
in  order  for  their  graduates  to  be  able  to  work  effectively  with  deaf-blind 
children.   They  are  experience-based  ideas,  quite  general  in  nature,  and  I 
would  like  to  share  them  with  you. 

,  Not  knowing  what  is  available  in  your  area,  I  can  only  speak  in  very 
broad  terms.   Much  of  what  I  have  to  say  are  practical  ideas  thay  may  have 
already  occured  to  you.   In  that  case,  my  presentation  would  help  reinforce 
them. 

For  those  of  us  who  have  worked  with  the  deaf-blind,  we  are  aware  of  the 
unique  problems  of  this  special  group  oi  children.   Their  education  and  eventual 
realization  of  their  optimum  potential  jn  society  depends  so  much  on  well-trained 
and  effective  personnel.   This  is  why  wt  should  direct  a  great  deal  of  attention 
towards  organizing,  and  implementing  a  1  ruly  good  teacher-training  program. 

In  starting  a  teacher-training  pro;, ram,  it  is  essential  to  consider: 

1.  Specific  needs  of  the  pari  icular  students  you're  serving 

2.  Availability  of  appropriai e  teaching  personnel 

3.  Accessibility  of  support  services  in  local  area 

4.  Availability  of  funds 

Elioseff,  Jane.  "Educable"  -  any   hi  Id  who  promises  to  be  able  to  learn 
language  with  'appropriate1  instruction  and  sensory  aids,  whether  or  not  he 
also  is  considered  capable  of  eventual,  significant  academic  accomplishment." 


-  3  - 

Specific  Needs  of  Students 

The  deaf-blind  population  has  a  wide  range  of  needs  and  disabilities. 
One  has  to  focus  on  the  particular  needs  of  the  group  in  your  program.   If  the 
existing  program  involves  low-functioning  children,  a  background  knowledge 
of  mental  retardation  and  methodologies  in  teaching  mentally  retarded  can  be 
helpful  in  developing  eating,  dressing,  and  toileting  skills.   If  you  have 
children  with  good  language  potential,  knowledge  of  appropriate  techniques 
for  teaching  language  to  the  deaf  would  be  imperative.   In  the  deaf-blind 
population,  one  can  also  encounter  language  disorders,  autistic  characteristics, 
and  many  other  learning  disabilities  which  equally  merit  special  attention 
in  a  teacher  preparation  program. 
Availability  of  Appropriate  Teaching  Personnel 

A  program  for  the  deaf-blind  needs  good,  qualified  and  experienced 
teachers  in  order  to  be  effective.   One  can  spend  hours  on  theories,  but 
there  is  no  substitute  for  experience.  I  find  that  teacher- training  programs 
based  in  colleges  and  universities  where  the  courses  are  taught  by  professors 
without  direct  involvement  with  deaf-blind  children  are  helpful  as  far  as 
theories  go,  but   sadly  lacking  in  practical  suggestions  for  actually  dealing 
with  the  real  situation.   Experience,  no  doubt,  is  beneficial;  but,  by  itself, 
limited  within  its  own  realm.   Obviously,  theory  should  not  be  learned  in 
isolation  of  experience  or  vice  versa,  but  the  two  should  complement  each  other 
in  a  teacher-training  program. 

You  have  made  initial  steps  towards  f or nal  teacher  preparation  in  the 
deaf-blind  field,  by  sending  two  of  your  teachers  to  be  trained  at  Perkins. 
They,  in  turn,  can  assume  responsibility  for  in-service  training  for  the 
staff  in  your  deaf-blind  program,  or  start  y.mr  own  professional  teacher- 
training  program  here.  However,  they  cannot  Jo  the  work  alone.   They  will 
need  the  help  and  support  of  personnel  in  related  fields,  e.g.,  audiologists , 
ophthalmologists,  psychologists,   social  workers. 


Another  way  of  training  teacher  personnel  is  to  invite  people  who 
already  have  the  expertise  in  deaf-blind  education  to  come  here  and  teach 
the  necessary  courses  for  future  teachers  of  tie  deaf-blind  in  this  country. 
I  heard  that  this  was  done  in  the  field  of  the  deaf  and  multi-handicapped  in 
Rio  de  Janeiro  last  July,  and  perhaps  a  similar  arrangement  can  be  done  for 
the  deaf-blind  in  Sao  Paulo. 

Exchanging  teachers  between  countries  is  exciting  and  professionally 
prof itable--provided  the  right  people  are  chosen  for  the  exchange.   There 
must  be  a  careful  selection  of  exchange  teachers  so  that  participating 
countries  can  contribute  to  as  well  as  benefit  from  each  other. 

The  choice  you  decide  to  make  to  acquire  trained  personnel  will  depend 
on  available  funding  and,  of  course,  finding  people  genuinely  interested  in 
taking  and  pursuing  the  training. 

Accessibility  of  Support  Services  in  Local  Area 

Whether  one  is  starting  a  program  or  has  one  already  established,  it  is 
advantageous  to  be  within  easy  access  of  support  services  such  as  clinics, 
hospitals,  colleges  or  universities,  and  rehabilitation  centers.   It  is 
impossible  for  a  training  center  to  provide  all  the  necessary  services;  and 
it  is  important  to  identify  and  utilize  community  resources. 

Availability  of  Funds 

Available  monies  will  dictate,  to  a  large  extent,  the  scope  of  your 
teacher-training  program.   Instructors  in  the  program  need  to  be  paid, 
materials  bought  and  activities  pertinent  to  the  training  program  financed, 
such  as  professional  visits  and  practicum  placements  in  other  related  traininj 
centers.   It  is  only  realistic  to  assume  that  a  teacher- training  program 
cannot  survive  on  love  and  dedication  alone. 


After  exploring  the  above  considerations,  let  vis  now  address  ourselves 
to  the  selection  of  applicants  for  the  program. 

Screening  and  Selection  of  Applicants  for  a  Teacher-Training  Program 

It  is  important  to  get  the  right  kind  of  person  into  a  training  program-- 
someone  who  is  sincerely  interested  and  will  be  committed  to  educating  deaf-blind 
children.   A  screening  procedure  and  selection  of  applicants  should  be  devised 
and  followed;  personal  interviews  should  be  required  and  conducted.   While 
personal  interviews  cannot  always  be  objective,  there  are  certain  kinds  of 
information  that  should  be  consistently  obtained  from  an  applicant. 
1.   Educational  Background 

Although  teacher- training  programs  for  the  deaf -blind  in  the 
United  States  do  not  usually  require  a  background  in  elementary  education 
from  their  applicants,  I  personally  prefer  those  which  do.   I  have 
observed  that  the  teacher-trainees  with  a  background  in  elementary 
education  can,  without  too  much  ingenious  modification,  make  use 
of  their  knowledge  of  curriculum  for  normal  children;  and  with  minimal 
guidance,  adapt  certain  Instructional  materials  to  the  level  of  the 
deaf-blind  group  they're  teaching.   It  is  an  accepted  fact  that 
deaf-blind  children  follow  a  normal  sequence  of  growth  and  develop- 
ment, but  at  a  much  slower  rate  and  with  limitations  set  by  their 
handicaps.   The  general  principles  of  teaching  normal  children  con- 
cerning repetition,  reinforcement,  lesson  planning  and  individualized 
programming  are  also  applicable  to  handicapped  children.   Therefore, 
it  is  not  surprising  that  someone  with  an  elementary  education  background 
coming  into  a  teacher-training  program  for  the  deaf-blind  would  be  a  step 
ahead  technically  because  of  that  background. 


2 .   Personal  Experience  and  Interests 

A  person  who  has  had  experience  volunteering  services  for,  or 
working  with  the  handicapped,  is  naturally  preferable  over  another 
applicant  who  hasn't.   It  seems  highly  unlikely  that  someone  who  has 
nevery  shown  interest  with  the  handicapped  before  applying  for  the 
program  would  remain  in  the  field  for  long.   We  need  people  who  will 
be  committed  to  the  education  of  our  deaf-blind  children  and  become 
advocates  for  them. 

I  know  quite  a  number  of  people  who  are  teaching  the  deaf-blind 
now  who  came  with  seemingly  unrelated  fields  of  experience  such  as  music 
engineering,  philosophy,  fine  arts  and  library  science.   However, 
their  interest  in  the  handicapped  had  been  sparked  by  having  a  deaf 
or  a  blind  family  member  or  relative;  by  having  volunteered  services 
with  the  handicapped,  or  by  encountering  some  special  event  in  their 
lives  involving  a  handicapped  person.   It  is  rare  that  a  person  who  has 
had  no  previous  idea  or  exposure  !:o  working  with  the  handicapped,  would 
make  a  dedicated  and  effective  teacher  for  our  deaf-blind  children. 
It  becomes  an  unfortunate  incident,  indeed,  when  some  people  who  are 
not  quite  sure  of  what  they  want  to  do,  use  teaching  the  handicapped 
as  a  testing  ground.   I  strongly  believe  that  no  endeavor  succeeds 
unless  your  heart  is  in  it. 
-*•   Special.  Talent  and  Hobbies 

Most  everyone  has  a  special  interest  and  talent.   It  is  helpful 
to  discover  what  the  applicant's  area  of  strength  is  in  order  to 
encourage  it  and  capitalize  on  it.   In  the  event  that  a  team-teaching 
situation  is  warranted,  an  individual's  particular  expertise  can 
be  used  to  advantage  in  that  arrangement. 


-  7  - 

4 .   Results  of  Formally- Administered  Tests 

College  or  university-based  teacher  training  programs  usually 
require  successful  completion  of  formal  tests.   You  may  elect  to 
include  this  in  your  overall  criteria  for  choosing  quality  applicants. 
Sometimes,  though,  it  is  not  always  the  person  getting  the  highest 
marks  on  a  test  that  make  the  best  teacher.   A  student  teacher  with 
average  grades  can  evolve  into  a  model  teacher  and  come  up  with  a 
great  deal  of  useful,  practical  ideas  for  his/her  children  in  the 
classroom.   I  think  it  would  be  interesting  to  include  a  period  of 
assisting  in  the  classroom  as  part  of  a  screening  and  selection 
procedure.   It  might  prevent  unjustifiable  elimination  of  a  student 
with  only  average  academic  achievement  but  otherwise  have  very  good 
potential  for  teaching  handicapped  children.   This  potential,  or  what 
can  be  recognized  as  a  natural  affinity  for  teaching,  can  be  observed 
only  with  the  applicant  working  directly  with  the  children. 

Teacher  Competencies  and  Teaching  Strategies  for  the  Deaf-Blind 

With  the  appropriate  applicants  to  che  program  selected,  there  needs  to 
be  a  well  though  out  curriculum  foi  their  professional  preparation.   Nowadays, 
there  is  a  definite  trend  towards  a  competency-based  curriculum  for  teacher 
training  programs.   A  simple  definition  of  a  competency-based  program  is  "one 
that  specifies  the  objectives  for  training  of  teachers  in  an  explicit  form 
and  then  proceeds  to  hold  the  prospective  teachers  accountable  for  meeting 
these  objectives." 

What  are  the  competencies  required  for  a  trained  teacher  of  the  deaf-blind? 
Those  of  you  who  have  been  in  the  field  will  probably  say  that  with  the  diverse 
and  complicated  problems  of  the  deaf-blind  population,  a  teacher  should  be  a 
" jack-of -all-trades ."   While  it  seems  facetious,  :  t  is  only  another  way  of 


saying  a  teacher  of  the  deaf-blind  should  be  vary  flexible  and  ready  to 
assume  several  roles  besides  teaching.   Because  of  the  wide  range  of  develop- 
mental abilities  among  our  deaf-blind  children,  it  is  important  for  the 
teacher-training  program  to  provide  courses  dealing  with  general  as  well 
as  specific  competencies  for  the  future  teacher.   What  follows  is  a  listing 
of  general  competencies  that  should  be  included  in  a  curriculum  for  teacher- 
training  programs  for  the  deaf-blind. 

1.  Demonstrate  knowledge  of  normal  child  growth  and  development. 

As  has  been  mentioned  before,  all  children  follow  the  same  sequence 
of  growth  and  development.   Deaf-blind  children,  although  going  through 
the  same  developmental  sequence,  will  vary  in  their  rate  of  growth. 
Some:  deaf-blind  children  may  remain  longer  at  a  particular  stage  of 
development  and  it  is  not  yet  completely  .understood  why  some  stay  longer 
at  one  stage  than  another. 

A  teacher  of  the  deaf-blind  should  hive  a  working  knowledge  of 
the  different  sequential  steps  of  growth  and  learning  so  that  unnecessary 
demands  are  not  made  before  the  child  is  ready  for  them.   It  is  of  the 
utmost  importance  that  the  teacher  introd ice  appropriate  activities 
or  concepts  at  the  right  time--and  the  opportune  time  is  when  the  child 
has  matured  to  the  point  of  readiness  for  them.   Tnerefore,  the  teacher 
should  have  the  ability  to  observe  behavior  accurately  or  use  other 
informal  procedures  in  order  to  determine  a  child's  developmental  level. 

2.  Demonstrate  knowledge  of  atypical  child  growth  and  development. 

In  addition  to  the  knowledge  and  abiLity  to  determine  a  child's 
stage  of  development  for  instructional  purposes,  it  is  necessary  to  know 
deviations  from  the  normal  growth  pattern.   Anyone  working  with  the 
deaf-blind  should  understand  how  the  combined  sensory  deficits  plus 


other  developmental  disabilities  affect  their  manner  of  learning  and 
retention  of  learning. 

3.  Demonstrate  knowledge  of  normal  language  development  and  language 
deviat  ions . 

Since  development  of  language  and  communication  skills  is  of  paramount 
importance  to  the  deaf-blind,  the  area  of  language  acquisition  occupies 
a  place  all  its  own.   Again,  it  draws  a  parallel  to  how  a  child  with  normal 
vision  and  hearing  learns  language.   A  teacher  should^  be  familiar  with 
the  different  phases  of  language  acquisition  and  be  alert  for  the  right 
moment  to  teach  appropriate  language  principles. 

A  concurrent  knowledge  of  deviations  from  normal  language  learning 
is  necessary  in  order  to  be  able  to  adapt  a  specific  language  teaching 
technique  to  remediate  the  problem.   Being  familiar  with  these  atypical 
language  learning  patterns  would  lessen  frustrations  on  the  teacher's 
part  and  enable  her  to  help  the  student  more  effectively. 

4.  Demonstrate  knowledge  of  vision  and  hearing. 

This  does  not  mean  only  the  psysiological  aspects  of  vision  and 
hearing,  but  more  importantly,  the  educational  implications  of  the 
combined  handicaps.   A  prospective  teacher  of  the  deaf-blind  should  not 
have  separate  courses  for  vision  and  hearing  and  then  be  expected  to  draw 
their  own  conclusions.   The  course  should  be  tailor-made  to  point  out  the 
unique  and  complicated  problems  of  deaf-blindness. 

5.  Demonstrate  knowledge  of  psychological  and  social  implications  of 
deaf-blindness . 

In  addition  to  a  formal  course  in  this  area,  it  is  extremely  helpful 
to  have  first-hand  information  about  how  deaf-blind  adults  react  to  social 
problems  and  how  they  managed  to  cope  with  the  problems.   At  Perl  ins,  we 


-10- 
did  invite  adult  deaf-blind  to  visit  and  "talk"  with  our  sti 
teachers  in  the  training  program. 

6.  Demonstrate  knowledge  of  curriculum  and  methods  of  teaching 
functional  elementary  school  subjects. 

I  added  the  work  ''functional"  to  the.  subjects  because  that  is  exactly 
what  is  needed  by  deaf-blind  children.   Even  when  the  program  has  academically 
inclined  deaf-blind  students,  the  subject  content  should  be  useful  to 
everyday  life.   It  is  good  to  stop  and  reflect  on  every  lesson  presented 
and  ask  oneself,  "Why  am  I  teaching  this?   How  can  the  child  use  it  in 
his  daily  activites?"   The  teacher- training  program  should  stress  this 
fact  so  that  the  deaf-blind  cl  ild's  valuable  time  in  school  is  used  to 
the  best  advantage. 

7.  Demonstrate  knowledge  of  j arent-teacher  interaction. 

The  teacher-parent  relationship  is  a  vital  one  during  the  deaf-blind 
child's  education.   The  manner  in  which  a  teacher  interacts  with  a  parent 
should  be  on  a  positive,  supportive,  and  professional  level.   Very  often 
teachers  get  so  involved  with  their  students  that  their  relationship 
with  parents  tend  to  be  too  emotional.   The  teacher- training  program 
should  help  prepare  a  teacher  for  a  professionally  acceptable  interaction 
with  parents. 

8.  Demonstrate  a  knowledge  of  total  programming  for  a  child. 

A  teacher  of  the  deaf-bliad  should  have,  the  ability  to  plan  for 
the  child's  total  program:   academics,  (if  called  for),  motor  development, 
social  behavior  and  emotional  development,  and  development  of  independent 
living  skills.   Most  programs  for  deaf-blind  children  are  in  self-contained 
classrooms  where  the  teacher  is  responsible  for  planning  and  teaching 
all  aspects  of  learning.   Therefore,  the  teacher- training  program  should 
prepare  the  teacher  for  this  particular  function. 


-  11  - 

9.  Demonstrate  knowledge  of  pre- vocational  and  vocational  preparation. 

The  young  deaf-blind  we  enrolled  seven  or  eight  years  ago  are  now 
young  adolescents  needing  a  diffetent  type  of  programming.   They  are 
ready  for  some  pre- vocational  training  activities  and  teachers  need  to 
direct  their  thoughts  towards  prepar      these  teenagers  for  some  type 
of  gainful  employment  in  the  world  outside  of  school.   Taacher-training 
programs  should  be  alert  to  the  changing  needs  of  our  deaf-blind  popu- 
lation and  include  necessary  courses  in  their  program  to  meet  these 
needs . 

10.  Demonstrate  knowledge  of  administration  and  supervision  of 
special  programs. 

It  is  not  uncommon  that  a  small  program  for  the  deaf-blind  in 
some  regions  may  require  a  teacher  to  assume  responsibilities  other  than 
teaching  because  of  the  fact  that  it  is  a  special  program  within  another 
school  program,  or  it  is  a  special  project  of  an  agency  which  is  not 
knowledgeable  about  the  deai-blind.   The  teacher,  therefore,  becomes 
a  liaison-person,  a  supervisor  of  his/her  aides  and  even  an  adminis- 
trator of  his/her  budget  for  the  year.   In  some  instances,  because  of 
the  shortage  of  trained  personnel  for  the  deaf-blind,  fresh  graduates 
of  teacher- training  programs  have  been  hired  as  supervisors  or  coordinators 
I  think  it  is  a  good  idea  to  familiarize  teachers  with  administrative 
and  supervisory  roles  and  functions  even  though  they  will  only  be  in 
the  classroom.   It  will,  hopefully,  give  them  more  insight  and  under- 
standing of  administrative  and  supervisory  problems. 


-  12  - 

Specific  Skills 

In  addition  to  the  general  background  knowledge  are  skills  specific 
to  teaching  the  deaf-blind: 

1.  Knowledge  and  skill  in  different  strategies  for  language  teaching. 

2.  Knowledge  and  skill  in  braille. 

3.  Knowledge  and  skill  in  sign  language. 

4.  Knowledge  and  skill  in  developing  and  remediating  speech. 

5.  Knowledge  and  skill  in  making  appropriate  instructional  materials. 

6.  Knowledge  and  skill  in  writing  individual  educational  plans. 

7.  Knowledge  and  skill  in  writing  lesson  plans  and  plan  evaluations. 

8.  Knowledge  and  skill  to  utilize  local  and  national  agencies  and 
services  for  the  deaf  and  for  the  blind. 

9.  Knowledge  and  skill  in  behavior  management  procedures. 

10.  Knowledge  and  skill  in  task  analysis. 

11.  Knowledge  and  skill  in  diagnostic  teaching  and  assessing  deaf-blind 
children. 

Qualities  of  a  Teacher  of  the  Deaf-Blind 

Besides  the  skills  and  competencies  that  will  be  developed  in  the 

training  program,  a  future  teacher  of  the  deaf-blind  needs  to  have  the 

following  qualities: 

Sincere  interest  in  working  with  children 

Patience 

Flexibility 

Understanding 

Reliability 

Sense  of  humor 

Willingness  to  invest  time  and  energy 

Ability  to  interact  effectively  with  people 

Creativity 

Enthusiasm 

Sense  of  personal  security  and  emotional  maturity 


-  13  - 

Webster  defines  patience  as  being  able  or  willing  to  bear  pain  or 
trials  calmly  or  without  complaint.   I  don't  think  we  should  expect  our 
teachers  to  be  martyrs.   However,  there  is  a  certain  degree  of  patience 
and  tolerance  required.   There  should  be  the  abiLity  in  the  teacher  to  wait 
calmly  and  be  contented  with  little  progress  on  the  child's  part  over  a 
long  period  of  time.  There  should  also  be  the  willingness  to  tolerate  lack 
of  response  or  feedback  from  many  of  oar  deaf-blind  children. 

The  rest  of  the  list  of  qualities  sound  like  any  list  you  would  want 
for  just  about  any  work  position.   I  would  like  zo   emphasize  them  to  a 
greater  degree  for  any  teacher  of  the  nandicappei. 

Teacher-Training  Courses 

The  courses  offered  in  the  teache r- training  programs  will  necessarily 
depend  on  meeting  the  required  teacher  competenc  .esc   There  should  then  be 
general  courses  dealing  with  child  growth  and  development,  language  and 
communication,  vision,  hearing,  mental  retardation,  functional  academic 
subjects,  parent  teacher  interaction,  administra  :  ion  and  supervision. 
Additional  courses  should  cover  the  specific  comietencies  pertaining  to 
educating  the  deaf-blind  and  be  geared  to  the  teacher  trainees'  preferred 
professional  placement  in  the  deaf-bli  id  populat  on;  whether  it  be  with  the 
low  functioning  or  the  educable  group. 


-  14  - 

*  The  following  is  an  e cample  of  the  courses  currently  offered  at 
teacher-training  program  for  the  deaf-blind  in  the  United  States: 

MULTIHANDICAPPED  (DEAF-BLIND)  PROGRAM 
Course  Title 
Biological  Origins  of  Multihandicapping  Conditions 
Language  Acquisition 
Visual  Handicaps  and  Education 
Introduction  to  Audiology 
Multihandicapped  Education  Seminar 

Educational  Assessment  of  Children  with  Learning  Problems 
Braille,  Deaf-Blind 
Interpersonal  Relationships  I 
Educational  Psychology 
Research  Methods  in  Education 
Interpersonal  Relationships  II 
Manual  Communication 

Problems  in  the  Education  of  Visually  Handicapped  Children 
Remedial  Strategies 
Introduction  to  Language  Disorders 
Student  Teaching:  Handicapped 
Infant  and  Pre~School:  Exceptional  Child 
Infant  and  Pre-School  Practicum 
Working  with  Parents 
Behavior  Management  Strategics 
Teaching  the  Multihandicapped  Child 
Clinical  Practicum:  Multihandicapped 

*  Boston  College 


-  1.5  - 

The  above  courses  lean  heavily  towards  programs  for  low- functioning 
deaf-blind  children.   If  the  trainee  decides  to  work  with  the  educable  group, 
he/she  should  have  additional  courses  in  different  strategies  in  teaching  language, 

I  feel  very  strongly  about  the  tremendous  value  of  student-teaching  and 
take  the  pragmatist  view  of  education  in  this  area.  My  own  experience  has  taught 
me  that  a  teacher  can  only  acquire  confidence  and  effectiveness  through  working 
directly  with  the  children.   Observation  is  not  enough.   One  does  not  learn  to 
swim  by  just  watching.   There  should  be  as  many  and  varied  student  teaching 
opportunities  as  you  can  provide. 

The  length  of  practicum  periods  vary  from  training  program  to  training 
program.   Some  require  eight  weeks;  others,  a  full  semester.   Whatever  length  of 
time  is  chosen,  there  should  be  a  definite  plan  for  the  entire  period  of  the 
practicum.   One  college  which  sends  student  teachers  to  our  Deaf-Blind  Department 
requires  a  "contract"  for  that  practicum  period.   The  following  is  an  example 
of  an  eight-week  "contract." 

Contract  for: ,  Student  Teacher 

,  Cooperating  Teacher 

Practicum  Period: 

WEEKS  ONE  6<  TWO: 

The  student  teacher  will  observe  and  work  in  different  academic 
areas  to  become  familiar  with  the  children  and  their  programs. 
Eash  task  area  will  first  be  observed;  then  implemented  by  the 
student  teacher,  with  assistance  and  supervision  fiom  the 
cooperating  teacher. 
During  the  second  week,  she  will  plan  a  "Center"  activity. 

WEEK  THREE: 


The  student  teacher  will  he  responsible  for  planning;  and  carrying 
out  a  unit  in  a  cognitive  area  of  either  science  or  social  studies 
and  for  planning  language  and  writing  activities  for  all  3  children. 


16 


WEEK  FOUR: 


The  student  teacher  will  be  responsible  for  the  above  and  for 
speech  lessons  for  two  of  the  students. 


WEEK  FIVE: 


The  student  teacher  will  be  responsible  fcr  planning  and  carrying 
out  unit  work  in  a  cognitive  area  and  for  planning  and  carrying  out 
math  and  writing  lessons  for  all  three  students.   The  student 
teacher  will  be  responsible  for  planning  and  carrying  out  the 
"Center"  activity. 

In  addition,  she  will  assist  the  teacher  in  completing  student 
progess  reports. 

WEEK  SIX: 

Student  teacher  will  plan  all  activities  except  speech  lessons. 
She  will  carry  out  her  ideas  by  assigning  the  execution  and/or 
planning  of  some  of  the  lessons  to  the  assistant  teacher. 

WEEKS  SEVEN  AND  EIGHT: 

The  student  teacher  will  be  responsible  for  planning  all  areas  of 
children's  programs,  for  corresponding  witu  parents  and  for  arranging 
trips  and  special  activities.  She  will  assign  some  portion  of  her 
plan  to  the  assistant  teacher  to  carry  out. 

Evaluation  of  Student  Teaching 

There  should  be  a  close  observation  and  evaluation  of  a  student- 
teacher's  performance  throughout  the  practicum  period.   This  is  a  learning 
experience  that  can  be  made  challenging  and  rewarding  for  both  the  student 
teacher  and  the  cooperating  teacher. 

*  An  example  of  an  evaluation  sheet  that  I  have  had  to  fill  out  for 
a  college  on  their  student  teachers  doing  practicum  Ln  our  Deaf-Blind  Department 
follows : 


*  Boston  College  in  Boston,  Massachusetts 


3. 

4. 

5. 
6. 
7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11. 

12. 
13. 
14, 


1. 


2. 


PERSONAL  SKILLS 
Responds  sensitively  to 
children  and  youth 
Shows  enthusiasm  for 
teaching. 

Punctual  in  attendance 
Flexible,  inventive 
and  resourceful 
Aware  of  strengths 
and  weaknesses. 
Analyzes  effect  of  his/ 
her  teaching  behavior. 
Maintains  consistency  as 
to  what  is  expected  of 
students . 

Demonstrates  required  com- 
petence for  subject  areas 
to  be  taught. 
Demonstrates  decision- 
making ability. 
Meets  communication  stan- 
dards. 

Can  apply  theoretical 
knowledge  in  generating 
possible  solutions  to 
teaching  problems. 
Follows  through  on 
assignments . 

Works  cooperatively  with  ■ 
other  teachers. 
Identifies  the  needs  for 
value  clarification 
lessons . 


PLANNING 


Develops  immediate  and 
long-range  plans 
for  total  class,  which 
take  into  account  needs 

Selects  content  appro- 
priate for  level  of 
students . 


OUTSTANDING 

EXCELLENT  GOOD 

FAIR 

POOR 

UNABLE 
TO  JUDGE 

1. 

| 

2 

3. 

4. 

5„ 

r 

. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

10. 

11. 

; 

12. 

13. 

1  14* 

| 

1. 

2. 

! 
i 

3. 


4. 


Incorporates  student 
date  obtained  during 
instruction  in  plan- 
ning subsequent  acti- 
vities . 

OUTSTANDING 

EXCELLENT 

GOOD 

="AIR 

POOR 

UNABLE 
TO  JUDGE 

Designs  learning 
experiences  which  develop 
inquiry,  decision-making 
problem  solving,  discovery 
and  experimentation. 

4. 

States  goals  in 
clear  behavioral 
objectives . 

5. 

Arranges  differen- 
tiated assignments 
to  meet  needs  and 
abilities  of 
students. 

6. 

*■ 

Develops  instructional 
units  and  strategies 
in  terms  of  learning 
theory. 

7. 

J 

Organizes  for  small 
group  and  individual 
instruction. 

8. 

Groups  flexibly  for 
special  needs. 

9. 

Involves  students  in 
planning. 

10. 

Plans  with  cooperating 
teacher  and  other 
teachers. 

11. 

CONDUCTING  &  IMPLEMENTING  IN 
Demonstrates  in  at 
least  three  different 
lessons,  factual 
opinion  and  evalua- 
tion questions. 

STRUCT ION 
1. 

• 

Conducts  lessons  that 
result  in  student 
mastery  of  specified 
objectives . 

2. 

Varies  teaching 
strategy  in  accor- 
dance with  changing 
factors  as  time,  ma- 
terials, space,  etc. 

3. 

Copes  with  unexpected 
interruptions . 

4 . 

Supplements  lessons 
with  relevant  assign- 
ments . 

5. 

UNA3LE 
OUTSTANDING   EXCELLENT   GOOD   FAIR   POOR   TO  JUDGE 


6.  Avoids  punishment  for 
incorrect  responses. 

7.  Provides  necessary 
amount  of  structure 
to  prevent  confusion. 
Provides  continuous 
feedback. 

Establishes  atmosphere 
to  stimulate  interest. 
Leads  discussions 
effectively. 
Listens  to  students 
Gives  directions  which 
are  effective. 
Uses  appropriate 
audio-visual  mater- 
ials. 

Causes  students  to 
be  more  self-directed 
rather  than  teacher 
directed. 


ADMINISTRATIVE  DUTIES 

Demonstrates  under- 
standing on  room 
records,  reports,  etc. 
Assists  with  lunch, 
playground  activi- 
ties, etc. 
Assists  in  making 
classroom  attractive 
and  interesting. 
Participates  in 
school  meetings  and 
functions . 

Deals  with  behavioral 
problems  in  such  a 
way  to  minimize 
effect  on  students 
learning. 


6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

10. 

11. 

12. 

13. 

*~ 

14. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

. 

5. 

E.   ASSESS ING-EV ALU ATING 

1.  Uses  a  variety  of  evalua- 
tive techniques  to  assess 
all  aspects  of  learning. 

2.  Formulates  and  implements 
daily  as  well  as  long 
range  program  goals  and 
assess  progress  toward 
their  achievement. 

3.  Uses  standardized  tests 
in  classroom. 

4.  Constructs  pre  and  post 
teaching  diagnostic 
instruments. 

5.  Identifies  learning 
handicap  in  student. 

6.  Discriminates  learning 
styles  of  individuals. 

7.  Evaluates  student  perfor- 
mance according  to  stated 
objectives. 

8.  Prepares  and  administers 
four  objective  instruments 
of  evaluation. 

S.    Provides  activities 

whereby  students 

evaluate  their  own 

program. 
10.   Recognizes  causes  of 

unsatisfactory  progress. 


OUTSTANDING   EXCELLENT   GOOD 


UNABLE 
TO 
FAIR   POOR  .  JUDGE 


1. 

2- 

1  3- 

* 

! 

\    4. 

i  5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

1 
i    9* 

'    10. 

-  17  - 

Evaluation  of  a  practicum  is  usually  done  by  the  cooperating  teacher 
and  the  supervisor  of  the  department.   Some  colleges  also  require  self- 
evaluation  by  the  student  teacher  herself.   Self-evaluation  using  a  check- 
list provided  by  the  school  is  not  always  an  easy  thing  to  do.   A  person  either 
underestimates  himself  because  of  modesty,  or  overestimates  himself  due  to 
a  super  ego.   Videotapes,  I  find,  are  good  tools  for  evaluating  a  student 
teacher's  classroom  experiences.  They  can  see  themselves  and  analyze  them- 
selves more  critically  using  this  medium.   The  videotape  tan  be  done  twice 
during  the  practicum  period.   Once  at  the  beginning;  and  again  at  the  end 
of  the  period  for  comparison.   Has  there  been  any  improvement  in  the  student 
teaching  performance? 

Efforts  should  be  made  to  make  the  contents  and  procedures  of  a  teacher 
training  program  as  relevant  as  possible  to  the  functions  that  the  future 
teacher  will  perform  in  his/her  everyday  day.   Deaf-blind  children  need 
well-trained  and  committed  teachers  to  realize  their  maximum  potential. 
A  good  teacher-training  program  can  do  much  towards  the  making  of  an  effective 
teacher.   Just  as  a  teacher  is  accountable  for  her  work  with  the  children, 
so  is  it  the  teacher-training  program's  responsibility  to  do  their  best  to 
produce  the  most  competent  teachers  for  our  deaf-blind  children. 


REFERENCES 


Corrigan,  Dean.    The  Study  of  Teaching,  Commission  on  the  Implications 
of  Recent  Research  in  Teaching,  The  Association  for  Student 
Teaching,  1967 

Elioseff,  Jane.   Training  of  Personnel  for  the  Education  of  Deaf-Blind 
Children,  Proceedings  of  the  Fourth  International  Conference  on 
Deaf-Blind  Children,  1971,  Perkins  School  for  the  Blind,  Watertown, 
Massachusetts  ^ 

Franklin,  Barbara.   Multiple  Handicapped  (Deaf-Blind)  Teacher-Training 
Program,  San  Francisco  State  College ,  Proceedings  of  the  Fourth 
International  Conference  on  Deaf-Blind  Children,  1971,  Perkins 
School  for  the  Blind,  Watertown,  Massachusetts 

Hart,  Verna.   Training  of  Personnel ,  1977,  State  of  the  Art,  Perspectives 
on  Serving  Deaf-Blind  Children 

Sarason,  S.,  Davidson,  K. ,  and  Blatt,  B.   The  Preparation  of  Teachers 
1962,  John  Wiley  and  Sons,  Inc.  New  York 

Stenquist,  Gertrude.   Social  Problems  of  Deaf-Blind  Children.   Proceedings 
of  the  Fourth  International  Conference  on  Deaf-Blind  Children,  1971, 
Perkins  School  for  the  Blind,  Watertown,  Massachusetts 

Watkins,  Keith.   Training  of  Personnel  for  the  Education  of  Deaf-Blind 
Children,  Proceedings  of  the  Fourth  International  Conference 
on  Deaf-Blind  Children,  Perkins  School  for  the  Blind,  Watertown, 
Massachusetts. 


CRISTINA  S.  CASTRO 


EDUCATIONAL  BACKGROUND 


1950 


1954 


High  School  Diploma 


B.S.E.      (English  major;    library 
science  minor) 


1957-1959  M.S.    in  Speech  and  Hearing 


Far   Eastern  University 
Manila,    Philippines 

University  of   the   Philippines 
Quezon  City,    Philippines 

Central   Institute   for  the  Deaf 
Washington  University 
St.   Louis.  Missouri 


1960-1961    Perkins-Boston  University  Course 
for  Training  Teachers  of  the 
Deaf-Blind 


1960-1975    Courses  Taken: 

1960-1962    27  credits  towards  a  Doctorate's 
degree  in  Special  Education 

1967        Summer  course  in  use  of 

Cuisenaire  riethod  in  Math 


Boston  University 
Boston,  Massachusetts 

Natick,  Massachusetts 


1968        A  Positive  Approach  to  the  Problems- 
of  the  Perceptually  Handicapped 


1972       Fall  Semester 

Ed.  259  -  Supervision  I 

1973 '       Human  Development  Seminar 
(Institute  for  Continuing 
Studies  in  Psychology 

1972-1973   Basic  Course  in  Sign  Language 


1974-1975   Intermediate  Course  (I)  in 
Sign  Langua  ge 

1975-1976   Intermediate  Course  (II)  in 
Sign  Language 


MACLD 

State  Headquarters 

Waltham,  Massachusetts 

Boston  College 

Chestnut  Hill,  Massachusetts 

Newton  College  of  the  Sacred 
Heart,  Newton,  Massachusetts 


Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 
Watertown,  Massachusetts 

Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 
Watertown,  Massachusetts 

Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 
Watertown,  Massachusetts 


EMPLOYMENT 

1954  (1  semester)    -  Substitute  English 
teacher.   Classes  of  4-5  deaf 
freshmen  and  senior  students 


School  for  the  Deaf  &  the  Blind 
Pasay  City,  Philippines 


1955  (1   semester)        -   Substitute  English 
teacher.      Regular  classroom  of  28 
freshman  students 

1956  (1   semester  -   Substitute  Librarian 

Responsible   for  managing   the  high 
school   library 

1956-1957      English  Teacher.      Classes   of  3-4  blind 
or  deaf   freshmen,    juniors  and  seniors 

1959-1960     Consultant   for   the  Deaf 

Responsible  for  following  up  five 
deaf  teenagers  integrated  in  five 
different  high   schools 

1961-1969     Teacher  of   2-3   deaf-blind   children 

with  additional  handicaps   of  develop- 
mental  disability  and   language   disorders 

1969-1971     Supervising  Teacher 

Supervisor  of  59-69   students  and  40-44 
staff  with  major   involvement   in  the 
Teacher-Training   Program 

Part-time  lecturer 


1971- 
present 


Principal 

Shares  in  administrative  responsi- 
bility for  71   students  and  43  staff 
with  Head  of  the  Department,  and 
supervises  31  students  and  18  staff 
members  with  involvement  in  super- 
vising student  teachers  from  several 
colleges. 


SUMMER  EMPLOYMENT 

1956  Tutor  in  English  and  Biology 

1957  Camp  Counselor 

1960    Speech  Teacher  for  the  deaf 


1967    Tutor  for  a  deaf-blind  teenager 
in  high  school 

19  69    Language  Curriculum 

Project  for  Deaf-Blind  Department 


-  Lepanto  High  School, 
Mountain  Province,  Philippines 

-  Lepanto  High  School, 
Mountain  Province,  Philippines 

-  School  for  the  Deaf  and  the  Blinci 
Pasay  City,  Philippines 

-  Grand  Rapids  Board  of  Education 
Grand  Rapids,  Michigan 


-  Deaf-Blind  Department 

Perkins  School  for  the  Blind, 
Watertown,  Massachusetts 

Deaf-Blind  Department, 
Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 
Watertown,  Massachusetts 


Boston  College, 

Chestnut  Hill,  Massachusetts 

Deaf-Blind  Department 
Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 
Watertown,  Massachusetts 


-  Lepanto  High  School, 

.  Mountain  Province,    Philippines 

-  St.  Louis,  Missouri 

-  Bay  Cliff  Health  Camp 
Upper  Peninsula,  Michigan 

-  Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 
Watertown,  Massachusetts 

-  Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 
Watertown,  Massachusetts 


PUBLICATIONS 


1973 


1974 


'Communication" 


"Three  Methods  of  Teaching 
Language:   Fitzgerald  Key, 
Rhode  Island  Sentence  Pattern 
<5c  Monsees  Structured  Language" 


Workshop  Proceedings  of  Southeast 

Regional  Workshops  for  Teachers  of 

Deaf-Blind 

Ellisville,   Mississippi 

Part  of  a  Language  Module 
South  Central  Regional  Center 
Service   to  Deaf-Blind  Children 


NON- PUBLISHED  MATERIAL 

1969  Chapter   19   -   Planning   Special 

Experiences  Appropriate   for 
Concept   Development  and  Con- 
versational Opportunities    for 
Partially-Seeing,   Hearing   Im- 
paired 


CONFERENCE   PARTICIPATION 


1971  Panel  member   for   discussion  period: 

"Program  for  Verbal  Deaf-Blind  Children' 
Fourth   International  Conference  on 
Deaf -Blind  Children 

1973  Speaker  at   the  Southeast  Regional 

Workshop  for  Teachers  of  Deaf-Blind 
Topic:  "Communication  of  Deaf-Blind 
Children" 


•Perkins   School   for   the  Blind 
Watertown,   Massachusetts 


-   Ellisville,   Mississippi 


LECTURES 


1969-1971 


1970  - 
present 


-  Language  Course  I  and  II 
Teacher  Training  Program 

-  Internship  Courses  I  and  II 


Two  lectures  annually  on  language 
teaching  and  development.   Training 
course  for  Child  Care  Workers  and 
Houseparents . 


■  Boston  College 
Chestnut  Hill,  Massachusetts 

•  Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 
Watertown,  Massachusetts 

Perkins  School  for  the  Blind 
Watertown,  Massachusetts 


CERTIFICATION 
1961 


1968 


Certificate   received  upon  completion  of  Teacher-Tra  hi  I  »* 
Program  to    teach   deaf-blind 
Perkins   School   for   the  Blind 
Watertown,  Massachusetts 
(  Perm^ner\f  Academ'C) 


Working  with  Parents  of  School-Aged 
Deaf-Blind  Children  and  Youth 


Pape :  presented  by:   Elizabeth  Banta 
At  the:   Brazilian  Seminar  on  Education 

of  the  Deaf-Blind 
Held  in:   Sao  Paulo 
Date:   November,  1977 


Working  with  Parents  of  School-Aged  Deaf-Blind  Children  and  Youth 

Who  are  these  parents? 

By  the  time  a  deaf-blind  child  is  ready  for  school  placement,  whether 
the  cause  of  the  impairment  is  congenital  or  adventitious,  the  parents  have 
had  a  unique  experience,  indeed.   There  is  no  specific  prior  training  for 
becoming  the  parent  of  a  disabled  child.   It  could  happen'' to  anyone.   It  is 
usually  an  unexpected  role  and  one  which  most  often  is  assumed  in  the  midst 
of  a  life  crisis  with  no  prior  experience  nor  models  to  draw  upon  in  order 
to  cope  with  the  situation.   Meidcal,  diagnostic,  child  rearing,  education 
and  training  needs  of  multi-impaired  chii  Iren  are  special.   The  event  of  a 
child  into  the  family  unit  has  a  sagnificant  effect  on  total  family  dynamics; 
so  much  more  so  when  the  child  has  many  special  needs.   Since  parents  are 
people,  first,  adapting  to  the  situation  can  vary  according  to  the  many 
different  variables  which  make  up  and  effect  any  of  us  as  individuals. 
Reality  factors  such  as  how  severe  the  child's  disability  is  and  the  quality 
and  quantity  of  resources  available  to  them  will  also  be  determiners  in  how 
well  parents  adapt  to  their  circumstances  over  the  years. 

What  are  their  needs? 


Parents  have  needs,  especially  related  to  their  disabled  child. 
Expression  of  those  needs  should  be  encouraged.   Conscientious  attempts 
should  be  made  to  help  meet  those  needs.   Rather  than  focus  on  them  in  depth 
at  this  time,  I  will  refer  you  to  two  papers  which  I  wrote  which  particularly 
relate  to  parent  needs—continuous ,  immediate  and  future  needs.   Those  papers  art 


-  2  - 

1.  "Parents  of  Deaf-Blind  Children:   Some  Immediate  and 
Continuing  Needs."   Found  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  1971 
International  Conference  on  the  Education  of  Deaf-Blind 
Children.   This  paper  places  more  emphasis  on  the  pre-school 
years  and  the  diagnosis  and  evaluation  period. 

2.  "Parent  Education  in  Families  of  Teen-Aged  or  Young  Adult 
Deaf -Blind  Persons."   Found  in  the  Proceedings  of  the  1976 

International  Deaf-Blind  Seminar.   This  paper  places  emphasis, 

2 
then,  on  the  older  child. 

These  papers  are  only  a  beginning  attempt  to  document  parent  needs  and 
are  meant  to  bring  attention  to  the  importance  of  recognizing  and  working 
toward  meeting  parent  needs. 

Although  needs  differ  for  different  individual  parents  at  different  times 
some  exa-ples  of  continuous  needs  or  concerns  which  can  frequently  be  seen  in 
groups  of  parents  over  extended  periods  of  time  include: 

1.  for  support  in  meeting  crisis  and  developing  strong  but 
healthy  coping  mechanisms. 

2.  to  understand  the  disability,  its  effects,  its  combined  effects 
and  its  limitations. 

3.  for  a  feeling  of  accomplishment  in  their  own  parenting  of  a 
disabled  child  and  his  siblings. 

4.  to  support  their  child  in  and  relate  positively  to  agencies 
which  provide  an  education  or  tr<  ining  program  over  an  extended 
time  period  and  perhaps  at  some  distance  from  home. 

5.  for  management  of  feelings  related  to  the  disabled  child. 

6.  to  be  an  advocate  for  their  child. 


Many  concerns  related  to  the  future  often  revolve  aiound  the  question 
of  what  will  become  of  the  child  when  the  parents  can  no  longer  care  for  him. 
Immediate  needs  often  relate  to  the  specific  growth  and  development  level  the 
child  has  reached.   The  parents  will  usually  exhibit  a  need  to  become  more 
competent  in  his  parenting  role.   We  must  become  more  sensitive  to  all  of  these 
needs.   There  may  be  openness  and  great  dependency  on  the  professionals. 
Parents  can  be  very  vulnerable  at  such  times.   Professionals  must  be  aware  of 
the  responsible  position  that  vulnerability  places  them  in. 

Too  frequently,  once  the  child  enters  a  school  program  and  the  years 
wear  on,  family  contact  becomes  less  frequent.   Needs  may  not  be  so  obvious. 
Parents  may  appear  to  be  coping  and  asking  little.   It  is  a  mistake  to  overlook 
the  importance  of  continuous  work  with  the  family.   Programs  which  do  not  take 
into  account  parent  needs,  automatically  set  up  barriers,  particularly  in  the 
ongoing  school/home  relationship  and  in  the  future  possibilities  for  that 
child. 

What  are  the  parent' s  rights  ? 

I  have  read  many  lists  which  differ  from  author  to  author.   However, 
if  we  remember  that  children  are  first  the  responsibility  of  their  parents, 
that  parents  can  be  the  child's  greatest  resource  and  perheps  his  strongest 
and  most  consistent  advocate,  that  the  home  environment  car 't  really  be 
duplicated,  and  that  with  the  disabled  child  more  time  may  be  spent  at  home 
than  any  other  place  during  his  lifetime,  the  importance  of  respecting  the 
parent  and  his  rights  is  obvious. 

Certainly,  parents  should  have  the  right  to  such  things  as  information 
relative  to  their  child's  disability;  information  about  anc  assistance  from 
education  and  training  facilities,  medical  services  and  other  community 


resources;  hope,  reassurance  and  human  consideration  as  they  try  to  meet 
the  challenge  of  raising  a  child  v/ith  special  needs;  opportunities  for  them- 
selves and  their  child  which  are  equal  to  those  in  which  there  is  no  disability 
in  the  child;  chances  to  have  dialogue  with  other  parents  of  children  with 
similar  needs;  and  the  opportunity  to  actualize  their  own  personal  rights  as 
growing,  unique  individuals,  apart  from  their  children.   This  list  could 
easily  be  expanded.   If  we  ask  ourselves  what  rights  would  we  like  if  we  were 
the  parent  of  a  disabled  child,  we  can  take  a  beginning  strep  in  understanding 
this  question.   Too  often  parent's  rights  are  lost  in  the  shuffle,  even  by 
well-meaning  persons  who  have  focused  full  attention  on  a  disabled  child  to 
the  exclusion  of  all  else. 

Clearly,  it  is  time  for  us,  in  educational  settings,  to  realize  that 
we  can  provide  and  are  responsible  for  comprehensive  services  to  families 
of  impaired  children  enrolled  in  our  progams .   Why  shouldn't  problems  which 
arise  from  the  presence  of  a  disabled  child  in  the  family  be  as  much  of  an 
appropriate  concern  of  an  organization  or  person  serving  the  child  as  the 
problems  of  education  and  medical  treatment  for  that  child?   Parent  services 
should  not  be  seen  as  peripheral  service  but  as  an  equal  and  integral  part  of 
education  services.   They  need  support  at  every  level,  including  the  adminis- 
trative level.   A  concerted  effort  to  increase  awareness  and  to  offer  competent, 
comprehensive  services  is  a  present  but  also  a  future  goal. 

Why  Use  the  Term  "Working  With"? 

Those  words  appear  in  the  topic  of  this  paper  for  serveral  reasons. 
Among  those  reasons  are: 

-  professionals  must  remember  that  they  have  something  to  offer 
to  the  child,  to  be  sure,  but  that  most  of  us  effect  that  life 
in  a  temporary  way.   We  do  not  carry  primary  responsibility  for 
the  child. 


-  these  multi-impaired  children  are  complex.   In  order  to  better 
comprehend  the  child's  situation  and  to  assist  the  child  in  his 
growth  and  development,  a  group  or  team  effort  has  distinct 
advantages . 

-  if  we  are  working  along  with  each  other  for  the  common  good  of 
the  child,  cooperation  is  implied.   Attitudes  such  as  superiority 
or  competition  with  each  other  should  not  interfere.   No  one  need 
pretend  to  be  what  he  is  not.   Energies  can  then  be  given  more 
fully  to  the  task. 

The  concept  of  "working  with"  parents  is  a  useful  one  in  the  effort  we 
must  all  make  towards  more  positive  attitudes  related  to  families  of  the 
disabled. 

What  are  some  of  the  services  which  can  be  offered  in  ari  educational  setting? 

Up  to  this  point,  I  have  only  said  that  parents  of  disabled  children 
have  some  common  but  also  unique  needs,  that  they  have  rights,  that  it  is 
important  for  educational  settings  to  offer  services  and  that  the  attitude 
of  wishing  to  "work  along  with  parents"  is  a  productive  one. 

If  we  move  now  to  the  educators  point  of  view  and  question  what  our  roles 
should  be,  it  seems  that  most  of  the  functions  would  fall  under  the  two  major 
categories  of  an  advocacy  role  and  a  direct  interaction  role.   Critical  periods 
such  as  the  time  of  referral;  diagnosis  and  evaluation;  school  entrance;  early 
school  years;  later  school  years;  or  other  family  crisis  not  related  to  the 
child  all  have  concerns  specific  to  those  periods.   The  skills  of  parent 
interviewing,  parent  counseling  and  parent  education  can  be  appropriately 
used  by  the  educator.   Of  course,  in  cases  where  there  are  extreme  emotional 
disturbances,  the  role  is  more  appropriately  referred  to  and  assumed  by  a 


therapist  associated  with  an  outside  agency  specifically  available  for  more 
in  depth  assistance. 

However,  a  large  portion  of  the  educator's  role  is  related  to  the  use  of 
parent  education  in  meeting  family  needs.   Parent  education,  a  broad  social 
movement  in  our  own  culture  which  has  appeared  as  an  outgrowth  of  the  mental 
health,  adult  education,  and  family  life  movements  since  the  1880's,  is  seen 
as  more  than  information  giving.   It  aims  to  increase  the  understanding  of 
parents  at  many  levels  of  learning  and  through  many  kinds  of  educational 

experiences  so  that  they  will  achieve  individual  growth  and  develop  greater 

3 
competence  in  dealing  with  their  children.    Obviously  this  kind  of  an  approach 

has  supportive  as  well  as  preventive  possibilities. 

4 
Barsch   states  that  one  of  the  greatest  obstacles  to  widespread  and 

significant  advancement  in  the  field  of  special  education  is  the  failure  to 

find  a  way  to  incorproate  the  parent  of  the  child  with  special  needs  into  a 

reinforcing  role  of  value  to  the  child's  learning  advancement. 

Barsch  and  Fellendorf  and  Harrow   conclude  that  a  new  discipline,  Parent 

Counselor,  might  offer  more  knowledgeable,  appropriate,  available,  adaptive 

and  entitled  services  to  parents,  especially  parents  of  disabled  children.   A 

function  of  the  counselor  would  be  to  effect  change  in  the  "affective  and 

techincal"  aspects  of  the  parent  role  while  at  the  same  time  become  a  liaison 

person  and  a  conductor  of  required  services.   Presently,  we  can  find  a  number 

of  persons  fulfilling  such  a  role  from  lay  persons   to  professional  persons 

across  a  breadth  of  fields  of  specialty.   The  role  descriptions  for  a  parent 

counselor  vary    greatly.   Semantic  differences  complicate  its  understanding. 

So  that  then,  the  orientation,  the  job  description,  the  role  perception  and 

certainly  attitudes,  personality  types  and  so  forth  are  additional  determinants 

in  how  a  so  called  "parent  counselor"  would  function. 


If,  in  addition  to  the  administrators  and  the  teachers  in  an  educational 
setting,  it  were  possible  to  have  someone  on  staff  in  the  parent  counselor/ 
parent  consultant  role,  what  objectives  Jrr  a  parent  program  might  be  developed? 

Major  objectives,  which  might  be  included  in  a  comprehensive  parent 
program  where  the  children  are  multi-impaired,  the  setting  is  an  educational 
one,  and  a  person  has  been  designated  to  coordinate  such  a  program  are: 

1.   to  provide  effective  services  to  parents  of  the  children  actually 
enrolled  in  the  program  including  such  strategies  as: 

a.  assisting  in  the  immediate  intake  of  any  child  who  is  a 
candidate  for  the  program  and  where  the  parents  and  financial 
agents  have  agreed  to  make  application. 

b.  working  out  a  plan  whereby  immediate  and  ongoing  parent  needs 
and  wishes  may  be  diagnosed  and  recorded. 

c.  actively  supporting  the  educational  program  by  a  program  for 
parent  education  and  information. 

d.  providing  for  ongoing  individual  parent  counseling,  including 
crisis  intervention  and  referral  to  other  community  agencies, 
in  order  to  meet  both  parent  and  school  program  needs. 

e.  interacting  and/or  facilitating  ccmmunication  with  various  members 
of  the  school  staff  in  order  to  provide  ongoing  consultation 

and  follow  up  on  aspects  which  involve  families  and  where  the 
focus  may  be  on  administration,  ecucational,  social,  psychological 
vocational,  recreational,  or  cottage  living  needs  and  programming; 
travel  arrangements;  financing;  health;  appropriate  keeping  and 
dissemination  of  records;  evaluations  or  re-evaluations;  reports 
of  progress;  program  changes;  termination;  or  referrals. 


-  8  - 

f.  providing  for  members  of  the  school  staff  and  for  other  interested 
professional  or  professionals  in- training,  in-service  education 
related  to  families  of  deaf-blind  children. 

g.  providing  and  receiving  consultation  services  from  other  agencies 
in  order  to  support  or  deliver  effective  services  in  behalf  of 
families . 

2.  to  participate  as  a  member  of  the  Educational  Evaluation  Team  including 
such  activities  as:  r 

a.  being  alert  to  case-finding  and  referring  any  child  whose  parents 
or  parent  substitutes  come  to  her  attention  to  the  appropriate 
persons  in  order  to  facilitate  scheduling  as  well  as  assisting 

in  data  collection  for  that  purpose. 

b.  participating  in  re-evaluations  or  screenings  as  well  as  initial 
evaluation  processes.   Parent  interviewing,  interpretation,  support 
and  education  as  well  as  participation  in  group  decision-making 
are  important  aspects  of  this  process. 

c.  reporting,  interpreting  and  active  follow  up  related  to  the 
outcome  of  the  evaluation  would  also  be  involved. 

3.  to  assist  in  the  task  of  public  information  in  behalf  of  deaf-blind 
children  and  their  families.   Strategies  include: 

a.   giving  of  information,  either  during  a  single  contact  or  in 
more  prolonged  dialogue,  on  the  availability  of  education  and 
training  resources,  on  the  value  of  disabled  children  and  services 
appropriate  to  their  needs,  on  procedures  which  are  used  in  seeking 
out  such  services,  and  the  like. 


b.  participating  on  committees,  writing  articles  for  publication 
or  conference  presentations,  or  consulting  with  other  agencies 
in  order  to  increase  understanding  of  the  disabled  child  and 
his  family . 

c.  supporting  the  parent,  as  his  advocate,  especially  in  legislative 
considerations  or  in  meetings  when  they  might  be  absent. 

d.  initiating  investigations  or  scientific  research  which  would 
yield  information  toward  better  understanding  and  support 

of  deaf-blind  children  and  their  families. 

If  we  don' t  have  a   lot  of  resources,  can  we  offer  service  to  families? 

Yes,  we  can  and  should  because  no  matter  how  small  our  educational  program 
is  for  children,  there  are  still  occasions  when,  for  instance, 

1.  someone  must  act  in  the  capacity  of  parent  advocate  such  as  in 
administrative  planning,  in  staff  planning,  and  in  numerous  informal 
ways  . 

2.  decreasing  psychological  distance  between  the  parent  and  child 
and  the  parent  the  the  school  is  critical. 

3.  increasing  parent  competency,  especially  in  the  communication 
aspect  of  child  management  and  parent-child  interactions  is  of  prime 
concern. 

4.  there  is  need  for  support  of  the  total  educational  service  via 
maximizing  parent  roles. 

5.  we  wish  to  encourage  a  caring,  respectful,  involved,  reality-based 
attitude  in  staff  toward  parents. 


-  10  - 

What  are  some  of_  the  things  which  interfere  in  developing  adequate  parent  services' 
We  have  already  mentioned  some: 

1.  lack  of  awareness  of  parent  feelings,  needs  and  rights. 

2.  lack  of  appreciation  for  the  role  the  educator  can  take. 

3.  lack  of  positive  attitudes  toward  a  working  relationship  with  parents. 

4.  lack  of  administrative  support  (including  provision  of  time,  staff, 
monies ,  e  tc . ) . 

5.  lack  of  specialized  personnel. 
Others  might  include: 

1.  failure  to  establish  rapport  with  parents. 

2.  failure  to  examine  our  own  feelings  and  thoughts  related  to  working 
with  parents  including  fear  of  failure  or  fear  that  parents  will 

not  appreciate  nor  participate  in  any  activities  which  might  be  planned. 

3.  lack  of  confidence  and  imagination  in  how  to  work  out  services  to 
families  of  disabled  children. 

4.  lack  of  planning  based  upon  realistic  alternatives  and  lack  of 
flexibility  in  the  service  program  which  will  allow  for  responses 
according  to  changing  individual  parent  needs. 

5.  lack  of  competence,  including  preparation  and  experience,  on  the 
part  of  staff.   More  specifically,  perhaps  lack  of  good  communication 
skills  on  the  part  of  both  the  school  personnel  and  the  families. 

Who,  from  an  educational  se  tting,  has  much  to  offer  in  the  role  of  working 
with  families? 

At  this  period  in  time,  few  programs  have  parent  counselors,  as  previously 
described.  Additionally,  not  all  of  the  direct  work  with  parents  can  or  should 
be  done  by  a  person  in  such  a  role.   There  are  other  staff  persons  who  also  have 


-  11  - 

vital  relationships  related  to  families.   It  is  the  responsibility  of  the 
existing  staff  to  try  to  fulfill  the  existing  needs.   Services  should  be 
based  upon  actual  needs.   Some  responsibilities  naturally  fall  to  those 
heading  children's  programs.   However,  the  teacher  role  looms  large.   It 
particularly  does  so  because  the  teacher  shares  some  of  the  parenting  functions 
and  her  expertise  in  daily  direct  contact  with  the  child  is  seen  as  important 
to  the  child's  growth  and  development  and  subsequent  level  of  future  functioning 
Surely,  the  teacher  is  a  key  figure  in  the  interaction  that  occurs  during  some 
major  adjustment  periods  such  as  when  the  child  is  separated  from  his  home* 
when  substitute  parenting  roles  are  assumed  by  some  of  the  school  staff*  when 
parent/child  experience  omissions  must,  in  some  way,  be  made  up  for;  when  there 
are  parent/child  communication  differences'  when  there  are  home  re-entry 
si tuations^  when  the  concern  is  over  the  disabled  child's  progress  or  future 
possibilities  . 

Included  in  some  of  the  teacher's  activities  related  to  the  parent 
might  be: 

1.   reporting  of  the  child's  experiences,  progress  and  problems. 

According  to  the  nature  of  the  program,  reporting  might,  for  example, 
be  done  via  frequent  letters  to  the  home,  extensive  bi-annual  progress 
reports,  notebooks  describing  the  daily  or  weekly  experiences  of  those 
children  who  will  go  home  that  frequently,  written  explanations  and 
recommendations  for  carry-over  for  those  children  going  home  for 
occasional  weekends  or  extended  vacation  periods,  and  phone  calls 
whenever  written  communication  isn't  sufficient  or  in  place  of 
written  communication  when  the  child  lives  in  the  local  area  and 
parents  are  easily  accessible. 


-  12  - 

2.  Making  home  visits,  whtn  possible,  to  establish  rapport  and 
attempt  to  bring  the  experiences  of  the  home  and  school  together 
and/or  inviting  parents  to  be  totally  involved  in  the  child's 
school  program  on  the  campus  for  a  few  hours,  a  day  or  more  days 
at  a  time. 

3.  Attending  meetings  in  which  parents  are  involved  such  as  school 
staffings*  state-education  plan  monitoring  meetings',  conference 
times  set  up  specifically  by  school  administration  or  supporting 
staff  which  are  designed  to  involve  parents  in  a  team  approach 

in  sharing  information  related  to  the  child's  progress  or  problems* 
or  conference  times  related  to  a  specific  problem  being  worked  on 
between  the  parent  and  others  such  as  the  administrator  or  parent 
consultant.   Teachers  might  also  attend  parent  organization  meetings 
and  be  available  for  parents  when  open  house  days  are  scheduled. 

4.  Referring  requests  for  services  made  to  them  by  parents  or  referring 
concerns  related  to  parent  problems  which  have  come  to  their  attention 
to  other  appropriate  persons  on  staff. 

We  have  given  some  attentiDn  to  attitudes  such  as  wishing  to  better 
understand  the  parent  situation  and  to  try  to  work  with  them  as  well  as  being 
aware  of  the  need  to  know  ourselves  related  to  such  interaction.   We  have  also 
listed  some  opportunities  for  taacher-parent  interaction.   That  list  can  be 
extended  according  to  specific  circumstances  in  each  of  our  settings. 

Now,  what  about  skills?   Trie  primary  skill,  of  concern  here,  is  skill 

6 

in  communication.   Goolsby   maces  some  basic  suggestions  which  might  help 

to  facilitate  school/parent  com uunica tion  such  as: 

1.   Assume  that  the  other  person  acts  in  good  faith.   In  our  case,  we 
must  assume  that  parents  are  concerned  about  and  involved  with  what 


-  13  - 

happens  to  their  child. 

2.  Permit  the  other  person  individuality  and  some  imperfection.   We 
must  remember  that  there  will  be  differences  due  to  such  things  as 
personality,  culture,  and  life  situations.   The  disabled  child's 
needs  are  only  one  aspect  of  a  parent's  total  life  situation;  he 
has  other  concerns  as  well. 

3.  Agree  upon  specific,  mutual  goals.   Remembering  to  do  so  will  avoid 
the  situation  which  is  too  often  seen  in  which  the  parents  are 
considered  to  be  negative  influence  because  they  are  not  doing 
things  according  to  the  profession's  idea  of  "my  way." 

4.  Develop  and  maintain  a  feedback  system.   Make  a  mutual  plan  for 
when  and  how  you  will  interact,  even  if  it  is  only  to  say  things 
are  going  well . 

5.  Work  at  improving  communication  skills.   This  includes  practicing 
non-defensive  honesty,  learning  more  through  reading  or  course 
work  about  how  to  communicate  better,  and  making  opportunities 
for  communication  to  take  place. 

In  the  list  of  practices  that  commonly  take  place  in  parent/teacher 
communication,  there  were  several  large  areas  which  might  be  briefly  focused 
upon  now,  for  our  purposes,  and  which  can  easily  lend  themselves  to  in-service 
training  sessions  in  our  own  settings.   For  example: 

1.   Reporting  of  experiences,  progress  and  problems.   The  content  of 

direct  contact  situations  as  well  as  written  communications  can  have 
a  significant  impact.   In  addition  to  conscientiously  attempting  to 
increase  our  own  awareness  of  our  message  as  we  are  in  each  interaction 
occasion  and  asking  parents  directly  for  feedback,  it  can  be  helpful 


-  14  - 

to  our  own  learning  to  do  some  reviewing  in  a  retrospective  way. 
We  can  call  upon  our  peer  group  to  read  samples  of  written  reports 
or  recall  a  dialogue  they  witnessed.   Together  it  is  possible  to 
discover  language  used,  misconceptions,  need  for  clarification, 
double  meanings  or  subjective  interference,  and  the  like  and  to 
find  ways  to  improve  those  communication  occasions. 

2.  Making  home  visits.   Teachers  are  often  more  comfortable  in  the 
classroom;  they  are  oriented  to  functioning  in  the  classroom  and 
it  is  also  "their  territory."   Some  assistance  may  be  useful  in 
such  things  as  in  learning  how  to  be  a  teacher-guest  in  the  home; 
in  learning  how  to  deal  with  family  dynamics,  especially  siblings 
(because,  after  all,  a  total  family  unit  is  effected  by  any  one  of 
its  members);  in  learning  to  resepct  the  parenting  role  and  their 
learning/teaching  styles  rather  than  imposing  our  teaching  style 
and  objectives  upon  them;  or  in  learning  how  to  assist  adaptation 
of  materials  and  opportunities  found  in  the  home  to  teaching 
objectives . 

3.  Inviting  parents/families  to  visit  at  school.   By  thinking  about 
it  ahead  of  time,  it  is  possible  to  turn  classroom  visitation  time 
into  a  positive  and  valuable  experience  for  all  concerned.   This 
would  include  preparation  of  the  children,  of  the  parents,  of 
ourselves,  and  the  classroom.   Evans   has  some  ideas  which  are 
helpful  related  to  this  item. 

4.  Attending/leading  meetings.   The  thoughtlessness  of  omitting  parents 
from  meetings  concerning  themselves  and  their  child  or  of  neglecting 
to  prepare  parents  for  such  meetings  should  be  overcome.   Additionally 


-  15  - 

we  often  need  to  be  better  prepared  ourselves  in  such  things  as 
being  ready  and  willing  to  share  information  and  concerns;  being 
open  to  asking  parents  for  their  ideas;  or  knowing  more  about  being 
a  group  leader  or  member. 
5.   Referring  parents  to  others  for  services.   It  is  important  to  take  our 
responsibility  for  working  with  parents  but  it  is  also  important 
to  know  when  a  concern  is  more  appropriately  referred  to  someone  else. 
This  is  especially  so  when  the  parents  needs  are  too  great  and  call 
for  psychiatric  help.   However,  there  remains  a  supporting  role  in 
making  referrals  which  should  not  be  overlooked. 

All  of  these  activities  require  that  the  teacher  be  sensitive  to  family 
members  and  their  needs,  especially  as  they  relate  to  the  impact  of  the  multiply 
involved  child  has  made  and  continues  to  make  upon  them  all.   Beyond  that,  the 
requirements  include  an  honest  intent  to  communicate  and  a  real  effort  in 
improving  competency  in  communication  skills. 

Conclusion: 

There  is  no  way  to  deny  the  fact  that  advent  of  a  severely  disabled  child 
has  a  tremendous  impact  on  the  lives  of  all  his  family  members.   The  educational 
setting  is  one  which  has  a  great  opportunity  to  reach  out  to  that  family's  human 
needs.   Even  if,  at  this  time,  personnel  do  not  exist  in  a  particular  setting 
with  the   primary  responsibility  being  directly  to  families  of  the  disabled 
children  they  serve,  much  can  be  done.   The  teacher/parent  relationship  is 
one  which  very  naturally  lends  itself  to  a  positive,  productive  partnership. 

At  a  time  in  history  when  time,  money  and  energy  has  been  spent  on 
almost  every  frontier,  the  frontier  of  interpersonal  relationships  remain 


-  16  - 

relatively  untouched.   We  need  to  pour  our  resources  into  increasing 
competency  in  reaching  this  valuable  objec tive--direc t  assistance  to 
individuals.   In  this  case,  we  ur"    c".f':rriny,    \'>    \.\,n   '!•-■.-><- m  :• .-:  '  ■  i  \-:    o-,.-j 
his  family.   It  is  an  interesting  and  exciting  challenge. 


ELIZABETH  M.  BANTA 

Elizabeth  Banta's  educational  background  includes  licensing  as  a  R.No  and  a 

B.S.  in  School  Nurse  Teaching;  a  M„S„  in  Education;  a  C„A0G.S.  in  Maternal 

and  Child  Health;  and  present  enrollment  in  a  Doctoral  Program  in  Special 
Education.   Work  experience  related  to  the  deaf-blind  includes:   Coordinator 

of  Preschool  .Services  at  Perkins;  Assistant  Coordinator  of  the  New  England 

Regional  Center  for  Services  to  Deaf-Blind  Children;  Member  of  the  Educational 

Evaluation  Team  for  Deaf-Blind  Children;  and  Parent  Consultant  at  Perkins 

School  for  the  Blind  for  parents  of  children  in  both  the  Blind  and  Deaf -Blind 
Departments. 


References : 


1.  Banta,  Elizabeth.   "Parents  of  Deaf-Blind  Children:   Seme  Immediate 
and  Continuing  Needs."   Paper  presented  at  the  International  Conference  on 
the  Education  of  Deaf-Blind  Children,  U.S.A.,  August,  1971. 

2.  Banta,  Elizabeth.   "Parent  Education  in  Families  of  Teen-Aged  or 
Young  Adult  Deaf-Blind  Persons."   Paper  presented  at  the  Sixth  International 
Deaf-Blind  Seminar,  Australia,  September,  1976. 

3.  Auerback,  Aline.   "Trends  and  Techniques  in  Parent  Education" 
New  York:   A  Child  Study  Association  Publication,  1960. 

4.  Barsch,  Ray.   "The  Parent  ot  the  Handicapped  Child"   Springfield: 
Charles  C.  Thomas,  Publisher,  1968. 

5.  Fellendorf  and  Harrow.   "Parent  Counselling  1961-1968"   Reprint  No.  929 
Alexander  Graham  Bell  Association  for  the  Deaf,  Inc.,  1970. 

6.  Goolsby,  Elaine.   "Facilitation  of  Family-Professional  Interaction" 
Rehabilitation  Literature,  Vol.  37,  tfo .  11-12,  Nov-Dec . ,  1976. 

7.  Evans,  Joyce  (ed.)   "Working  with  Parents  of  Handicapped  Children" 
Reston,  Vriginia:   Council  for  Exceptional  Children,  1976. 


I  SEMINARIO  BRASILEIRO  DE  EDUCAQAO  DE  DEFICIENTE  AUDIOVISUAL 


THE  PROGRAMME  FOR  THE 

MULTI-HANDICAPPED  BLIND  AND 

DEAF/BLIND  CHILDREN  AT 

CONDOVER. 


SEDAV  -  ABEDEV 


THE  PROGRAMME  FOR  THE  MULTI-HANDICAPPED  BLIND  AND 
DEAF/BLIND  CHILDREN  AT  CONDOVER. 


Condover  Hall  School  is  divided  into  three  units  to 
cater  for  the  special  needs  of  the  children. 

a.  A  former  Sunshine  home  that  has  become  the  infant 
section  for  twelve  deaf/blind  children  whose  ages 
range  from  three  to  eight. 

b.  "Pathways"  the  part  of  the  school  where  29  deaf/b 
blind  pupils,  ages  ranging  from  nine  to  sixteen  or 
seventeen  attend. 

c.  The  main  school  for  some  77  multi-handicapped 
blind  children,  in  the  age  group  11+  to  seventeen. 

The  catchment  area  for  the  school  is  the  British 
Isles.    Children  come  from  Scotland,  Northern  Ireland 
The  Irish  Republic,  the  Channel  Islands  and  from  areas 
and  counties  over  the  mainland. 

To  work  with,  and  look  after  the  children,  there  is 
a  staff  of  17  teachers  and  58  child  care  staff,  4  nurses 
and  all  the  maintainance,  housekeeping,  cleaning  and 
sundry  people  vital  to  running  the  establishment. 

Before  a  child  is  admitted  to  the  school  there  is 
always  an  assessment  period  of  a  week,  for  the  main  school 
children,  and  2  weeks  for  deaf/blind  children.   During 
this  period  we  try  to  see  if  the  child  would  benefit  from, 
and  could  cope  with  being  a  pupil  at  Condover. 

The  younger  children  are  nowadays  nearly  all  brought 
to  our  attention  through  firstly  being  visited  by  Advisers 
employed  by  the  Royal  National  Institute  for  the  Blind. 
If  an  adviser  feels  that  a  youngster  ought  to  come  to  our 
school  a  recommendation  is  put  into  the  report  odf  the  visit 

continued. 


and  then  it  is  the  responsibility  of  the  Local  Authority 
to  make  the  initial  approach  and  request  the  period  of 
assessment. 

The  Main  school  programme  differs  from  the  Overley  and 
Pathways  set-up  in  that  because  of  the  more  communicative 
children,  the  numbers  in  the  groups  are  generally  larger. 
The  whole  school  is  based  around  a  secure  family  unit  and 
froto  here  all  things  follow.    The  children  go  to  school 
from  their  "family"  and  return  afterwards.    This  way  we 
try  to  make  a  distinct  break  between  the  school  situation 
and  out  of  school. 

A  great  deal  of  work  is  however  done  in  the  family  unit 
and,  in  out  of  school  hours.    There  is  a  self-care  and 
independence  scheme  of  training  that  the  children  follow. 
It  is  almost  a  form  of  programmed  learning  and  enables  each 
child  to  work  and  succeed  at  its  own  level  of  ability  in 
self-care,  social  skills  and  skills  leading  to  social 
independence.    In  addition  to  succeeding,  motivation  is 
added  by  awarding  prizes  known  as  "competence  prizes"  at 
each  stage  of  success. 

ORGANISATION  OF  MAIN  SCHOOL  IN  THE  CLASSROOM. 

In  the  main  school  there  are  nine  classroom  groups, 
three  of  which  are  for  24  physically  handicapped  children 
and  one  for  a  group  of  eight  disturbed  children  who  benefit 
from  a  more  controlled  situation. 

Apart  from  swimming,  mobility,  handwork  and  homecraft 
the  latter  groups  remain  in  their  own  classrooms  for  lessons. 
The  other  children  move  to  specialist  areas  during  the 
morning  sessions  each  in  a  different  classroom.   Emphasis 
is  placed  on  numeracy,  oracy  literacy  (braille  and  sighted) 
and  handwork.   Each  child  also  has  two  periods  of  swimming 
per  week  and  two  periods  of  physical  education.    In 
addition  there  is  pottery,  homecraft,  music,  creative  work 
and  handicrafts. 

continuec1 


page  3 

In  the  afternoon  the  work  is  less  "formal"  and 
teachers  will  follow  a  course  of  environmental  studies, 
outdoor  activities  and  study  group  work. 

Children  are  put  into  a  classroom  group  where  it  is 
felt  they  will  get  the  most  benefit.    Selection  is  made 
based  on  age,  intelligence  and  amount  of  vision  and 
degree  of  mobility. 

The  intelligence  of  our  pupils  measured  on  the 
Williams  test  for  defective  vision  shows  the  following 
break-down:- 

I.Q   Below  50 40% 

50-70   32% 

70-90   21% 

90-100  2% 

100+   5% 


"D"  DEPARTMENT 

The  physically  handicapped  blind  children  are  placed 
in  three  classes. 

a.  The  more  able  intellectually  (with  a  high 
proportion  of  spina-bifida  children). 

b.  Children  having  communication  problems. 

c.  The  E.S.N. (S)  children  who  are  in  need  of  much 
care  and  have  a  special  programme  for  very  slow 
learners. 

NUMERACY 

We  have  our  own  number  scheme  and  the  children  follow 
this.  The  more  able  who  complete  it  go  on  to  an  advanced 
course  tailored  to  their  personal  meeds.  This  is  connected 
with  mobility  and  town  experience.  The  less  able  work  on 
pre-number  schemes  sorting  and  matching  shapes  and  using 
sand,  water,  lego  etc.  We  work  on  new  words  and  concepts 
making  each  exercise  as  completely  practical  as  possible. 

continued 


COMMUNICATION 

Communication  involves  oracy  and  literacy  skills.   We 
work  with  tapes,  print,  and  braille.    The  recording  of 
work,  interests  and  projects  is  considered  highly  important 
and  is  done  each  day. 

An  advanced  group  is  taking  a  course  which  consists  of 
literature,  the  natural  sciences  and  social  studies.    It  is 
envisaged  that  this  group,  using  tapes,  cassettes  and  print 
will  take  part  in  C.S.E.  Mode  3  or  even  integrate  in  certain 
subjects  with  a  nearby  comprehensive  school  to  take  the  exam. 
It  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  a  considerable  "back-up"  team 
will  be  needed. 

Group  "B"  concentrates  and  works  mainly  in  oracy  in 
every  lesson.    It  is  hoped  to  develop  meaningful  use  of 
words  at  their  level  in  everyday  situations.    The  Speech 
Therapist  is  greatly  involved  with  this  group  as  many  of 
the  children  have  poor  speech  and/or  speech  defects. 

Group  "C"  concentrates  on  vocabulary  at  a  lower  level 
on  words  used  in  every  day  living,  prepositional  phrases 
and  listening  techniques. 

CRAFTWORK  AND  WORKSHOPS 

All  children  are  involved  in  a  specially  devised 
programme  of  work  structured  in  such  a  way  that  children  with 
poor  hand  function  can  participate.   A  special  "work  day" 
is  set  up  where  the  youngsters  can  operate  as  they  will  be 
expected  to  when  they  leave  school.    They  work  at  making 
link  mats,  sawing,  cutting,  drilling  and  sorting  materials 
plus,  assembli&g  items. 

There  is  a  course  in  home  economics  which  works  closely 
with  the  child  care  scheme  and  using  the  specialist  aids 
available . 

MOBILITY  AND  SWIMMING, 

Most  children  receive  physiotherapy  each  day  or  are 

involved  in  exercises.    They  also  receive  mobility  training 

on  an  ongoing  basis.    One  young  man  has  a  sonic  aid  fitted 

to  his  wheelchair  and,  although  completely  blind  has  full 

mobility  around  the  hall  and  extensive  grounds.   He  uses 

the  lifts  and  navigates  himself  without  help* 

continued 


All  take  part  in  swimming  and  many  use  the  pool  for  hydro- 
therapy. 


OVBRLEY  HALL 

Overley  Hall  is  situated  about  ten  miles  from  Gondover 
Hall  and  caters  for  twelve  young  deaf/blind  children 
between  the  ages  of  about  five  to  ten.    Some  then  go  on  to 
Pathways.   We  also  take  the  assessment  children  which 
recently  have  averaged  about  three  a  term. 

The  children  are  divided  into  three  school  groups. 
The  reception  class  is  looked  after  by  two  National 
Nursery  Examination  Board  Nursery  Nurses:    the  middle  group 
with  a  teacher  and  an  N.N.E.B.  nursery  iiurse,  and  the  top 
group  with  a  teacher  and  a  helper.    The  children  are  grouped 
by  ability  rather  than  age. 

In  the  first  group  the  children  sometimes  show  marked 
withdrawal  symptoms,  they  may  lie  for  long  periods  just 
gazing  at  the  light  and  they  may  be  very  unaware  of  the 
presence  of  adults  or  the  other  children.    It  may  be 
difficult  to  achieve  eye  contact  with  them.    The  programme 
therefore  is  devised  to  stimulate  them  as  mueh  as  possible. 
They  have  a  great  deal  of  individual  attention  and  human 
contact  with  rocking  on  one's  lap  in  time  to  the  singing  of 
nursery  rhymes;  finger  and  hand  games;  encouragement  in 
copying  such  as  clapping  etc.    Percussion  work  is  carried  out 
usually  every  morning.    Sand  and  water  play  are  also 
necessary  activities. 

Another  essential  part  of  the  programme  for  the  children 
in  this  group  is  what  we  call"circuits".    This  is  part  of  the 
physical  education  programme  and  involves  following  through  an 
obstacle  course  varying  in  length  and  suited  to  each  child's 
capabilities.   Each  child  is  encouraged  individually  to 
complete  the  course, which  may  be  crawling  under  one  table, 
stepping  on  and  off  a  low  box,  crawling  over  another  table 
and  then  sitting  on  a  chair  ready  for  the  reward.    This  is 
usually  a  sip  of  drink.    The  circuits  may  be  followed  through 
as  many  as  five  times  a  session.    Once  the  child  realises 

continned 


what  he  or  she  is  doing  that  particular  circuit  is  not 
repeated.   We  have  had  excellent  results  using  these 
methods. 

In  the  intermediate  group  the  children  are  all  aware 
of  the  difference  "between  people  and  objects.    They  are  now 
ready  to  copy  gross  "body  movements  and  music  and  movement 
now  takes  the  place  of  the  "circuits11 .    This  activity  takes 
place  every  day  and  the  child  is  encouraged  to  follow  the 
helpers  activities  to  the  music.   Also  during  the  day  the 
child  is  encouraged  to  copy  and  use  some  of  the  basic  Paget 
Gorman  signs. 

The  children  have  also  to  be  taught  to  co-operate  and  to 
sit  at  a  table  and  make  up  simple  jig  saw  puzzles,  play  snap 
with  help  from  an  adult,  pellmanism,  dominoes  and  other  games. 
When  they  can  do  all  these  things  happily  and  enthusistically 
they  are  ready  for  the  top  group. 

In  this  group  all  those  activities  can  be  carried  out 
withojtt  individual  attention  and  the  games  can  now  be  played 
between  the  children  from  choice  and  no  longer  needing  an 
adult's  help. 

In  both  groups  great  attention  is  paid  to  getting  the 
child  to  the  "naming  stage"  by  using  as  many  Paget  Gorman 
signs  as  possible.    In  the  middle  group  the  teacher  uses 
the  picture  Ladybird  series  for  shecking  that  her  children 
can  recognise  a  basic  vocabulary  of  common  objects.    There 
are  six  books  that  are  particularly  suitable.   One  book  is 
cut  up  and  the  picture  stuck  on  to  cardboard  and  then 
covered  with  plastic  and  the  corresponding  book  is  left  intact. 
The  child  then  has  to  find  the  corresponding  picture  and  at 
a  later  stage  to  hand  over  the  correct  card  when  the  sign  is 
made.   Later  he  will  sign  it  himself.    The  words  he  can 
sign  are  kept  in  his  "tidy  box"  which  he  would  have  made  at 
an  "art  and  craft"  time. 

continued 


Art  and  craft  and  modelling,  cooking  are  all  very- 
important  activities. 

All  the  children  to  whom  it  would  be  of  use  go 
swimming  and  pony  riding.    The  latter  activity  has  proved 
to  be  extremely  worthwhile.    Some  of  the  children  can  now 
trot  unaided  and  will  follow  directions  without  being  led. 
We  are  delighted  with  the  results. 

In  the  top  group  the  children  are  all  managing  simple 
printing,  reading  and  number. 

We  have  been  able  to  have  an  "individual"  time  of  the 
day  between  H.ooarn  and  mid-day  and  this  has  proved  of 
enormous  benefit.   This  is  going  to  be  tried  again  this  term 
as  we  again  have  enough  st%ff  to  cope  with  it.   The  most 
spectacular  breakthrough  in  the  last  individual  programme 
was  achieved  by  our  laundry  lady.   She  took  one  of  the 
older  girls  and  instructed  her  in  washing  by  hand,  rinsing 
and  spinning  with  the  machine,  and  using  the  dryer.   The 
child  was  supervised  all  the  time  and  became  very  reliable. 
She  could  sort  out  the  dirty  clothes,  fold  up  the  clean 
clothes  and  knew  where  to  take  the  clothes  back  to  the 
nursery.    She  started  to  use  words  much  more  clearly  than 
before  and  suddenly  really  "came  alive".   We  were  surprised 
and  delighted  by  the  excellent  results. 

On  the  hpuse  side  we  have  two  family  groups  each  with 
six  children  and  the  etame  family  always  has  the  assessement 
child.   Each  family  has  a  family  mother,  assistant  mother 
and  two  juniors.   Of  course  as  it  is  residential  not 
everyone  would  be  working  at  the  same  time. 

The  accent  is  on  self-care  as  far  as  is  possible  and 
every  effort  is  made  to  encourage  the  children  to  do  as 
much  for  themselves  as  possible.   The  best  in  the  families 
can  set  tables,  wash  up  and  put  away,  be  taken  down  to  the 
kitchen  and  put  the  appropriate  plates  of  food  on  the  trolleys; 

continued 


help  with  some  of  the  sweeping  and  putting  chairs  on  tables 
for  sweeping  under;  making  their  own  beds;  going  round  after 
tea  and  turning  down  the  covers  on  the  beds.    The  less  able 
children  can  all  do  something  such  as  going  down  to  the 
kitchen  and  helping  to  push  the  trolleys  down  to  the  playrooms 
where  the  children  eat  their  meals.   They  also  do  a  little 
towards  dressing  themselves. 

As  far  as  mealtimes  go  the  children  are  split  into 
abilities  for  lunch,  the  top  and  middle  groups  eat  together 
in  one  playroom  and  the  little  ones  and  the  assessment  child 
unless  he  or  she  is  of  a  very  high  standard,  go  into  another 
nursery.   For  breakfast  and  tea  the  children  eat  in  their 
own  family  groups  but  still  in  the  two  playrooms. 

PATHWAYS 

Pathways  is  situated  within  the  grounds  of  Condover  Hall, 
and  caters  for  29  deaf/blind  children  between  the  ages  of  nine 
to  sixteen  or  seventeen. 

Initially  the  children  need  to  be  cared  for.    They  often 
need  to  be  fed  by  staff  to  ensure  adequate  nutrition.    They 
need  to  be  washed,  dressed  and  led  through  the  routines  of 
the  day. 

Secondly,  the  children  are  taught  self -care  leading  to 
independence  in  household  duties  so  that  they  could  live  in 
a  hostel  under  supervision,  but  without  help.    Some  are  able 
to  cook  for  themselves  and  clean  their  rooms,  so  that  they 
could  "keep  house"  for  limited  periods  if   parent  were  at 
home  in  the  evenings.    The  programme  of  training  is  like 
that  of  the  main  school. 

The  school  programme  is  designed  to  help  the  child 
become  more  and  more  aware  of  his  environment  through  a  wide 
variety  of  experiences.   Understanding  of  the  changes  which 
take  place  as,  for  instance,  a  seed  is  sown  and  grows  to  a 
plant,  is  harvested,  prepared,  cooked  and  eaten,  or  clay 

continued 


"becomes  part  of  a  house,  underlies  the  language  teaching. 

The  language  teaching  scheme  is  "based  on  a  minimum 
outline  of  sentence  structures  and  a  limited  vocabulary  of 
the  most  frequently  used  functional  words  -  pronouns, 
prepositions,  conjunctions,  adverbs  -  rather  than  verbs  and 
adjectives  and  nounti. 

Natural  language  is  taught  as  it  is  needed,  but  the 
sentence  structures  are  checked  to  ensure  that  progress  is 
made.   The  vacabulary  taught  is  not  limited,  but  by  ensuring 
that  the  most  used  functional  words  are  checked  we  can  tell  if 
progress  is  being  made  in  vocabulary.    The  method  of 
communication  does  slightly  affect  the  order  in  which  words 
are  learned.    Signing  a  fully  inflected  system,  learning  to 
finger  spell  and  learning  speech  are  all  part  of  learning 
language . 

It  is  essential  that  the  children  have  interesting 
happenings  to  talk  about,  new  events  and  new  things.   At 
the  same  time  repetition  of  activities  ensures  revision 
and  recall  and  the  extension  of  ideas.    Children  recall 
stimulating  and  exciting  events  best,  so  therr  life  needs 
colour.   Annual  events  help  to  establish  concepts  of  time, 
so  that  they  can  look  forward  and  reflect,  and  thus  learn 
to  use  tenses  with  understanding.   By  moving  things  and 
by  going  to  places  the  children  acquire  concepts  of  physical 
relationships  such  as  'over  a  bridge1  'along  the  road'  fup 
the  hill1  'far  away*  'a  little  way'  'round  the  corner'  'through 
the  tunnel ♦ . 

Real  activities  are  reflected  in  the  classroom  using 
models  and  making  them,  acting  and  pretending.   General 
knowledge  and  specific  areas  of  knowledge  are  all  dependant 
on  language  and  add  to  the  vocabulary  and  comprehension. 
Reinforcement  is  necessary,  and  certain  activities  provide 
useful  drills  e.g.  'hide  and  seek'  hunt  the  slipper'  help 
reinforce  prepositions. 

Many  'school'  subjects  are  preparatory  to  real  learning. 
Stomes  may  have  to  drop  into  water  and  the  concentric  rings 

continued 


page  10 


seen,  or  ripples  sensed  in  time,  before  words  such  as 
concentric  are  found  to  relate  to  reality  and  not  just  to 
apparatus  provided  for  a  purpose. 

But  none  of  these  activities  is  useful  if  not  related 
to  helping  a  child  to  be  a  good  companion  and  a  pleasing 
person.    This  is  the  real  aim  of  the  Unit. 


One  of  the  recent  and  very  worthwhile  additions  to  the 
staff  has  been  that  of  an  "After-care  Officer".   After  a 
preliminary  pilot  scheme  a  full  time  appointment  was  made 
in  1973.    This  means  that  we  can  offer  Local  Authorities  a 
great  deal  of  help  in  the  placement  of  our  school  leavers. 

PUPILS  LEAVING 

About  18-24  months  before  a  pupil  leaves  school  a  full 
educational  and  social  assessment  is  undertaken  together  with 
a  brief  medical  history.    There  are  so  few  objective  tests 
available  that  this  assessment  takes  the  form  of  written 
reports  by  teachers,  housemothers,  physiotherapists,  speech 
therapists  and  nurses  which,  when  collated  forms  a  four  page 
report.   An  informal  interview  takes  place  with  a  Careers 
Advisor,  Placement  Officers  from  the  Royal  National  Institute 
for  the  Blind,  the  pupil's  teacher  and  housemother  being  present. 
Recommendations  are  formulated  and  added  to  the  assessment 
report  which  are  then  forwarded  to  the  pupils  Local  Authority. 

The  recommendations  of  the  interview  vary,  but  the 

majority  of  pupils  are  recommended  for  placement  at  Adult 

Training  Centres,  Residential  Care  and  a  few  for  further 

vocational  training.   An  important  aspect  of  the  After  Care 

work  concerns  the  parents.    It  is  so  easy  to  evaluate  a 

pupils'  potential,  and  recommend  placement,  that  after  the 

pupil,  the  most  important  persons  to  be  involved  can  be 

overlooked,  namely  the  parents.   We  must  be  careful  not  to 

fall  into  the  trap  of  being  the  experts  and  forget  the  parents 

who  are  deeply  concerned,  and  often  extremely  worried  about 

the  future  of  their  offspring.    In  our  after  care  service 

parents  are  consulted  at  a  very  early  stage,  either  when  they 

visit  school  or  at  home. 

continued 


Placement 

The  continued  education  and/or  vocational  guidance 
of  our  pupils  is  generally  undertaken  at  the  Hethersett 
Assessment  and  vocational  Guidance  Centre  at  Reigate,  or 
Queen  Alexandra  College,  Birmingham  and  latterley  at  some 
other  centres  e.g.  The  National  Society  for  the  Mentally 
Handicapped,  and  the  Spastics  Society  etc. 

Placement  at  Adult  Training  Centres  is  proceeded  by  a 
visit  and  discussion  with  staff  of  the  possible  difficulties 
to  be  encountered  in  the  initial  introductory  period. 
Where  necessary  the  After  Care  Officer  arranges  to  be  present 
for  the  first  couple  of  days,  but  inevitably  finds  that  the 
staff  soon  become  intrigued  by  the  different  approaches  and 
techniques  necessary  to  formulate  work  and  educationally 
stimulating  environments.   Mobility  within  the  centre  presents 
the  biggest  problem  to  be  overcome  but  with  some  little  thought 
and  "planning,  it  has  been  possible  to  produce  a  scheme  of 
basic  training  allowing  access  to  the  work  area,  educational 
area,  toilets,  cloakroom  and  dining  area. 

Follow-up 

A  follow-up  visit  to  the  home  area  is  attempted  during  the 
first  year,  and  a  review  of  the  placement  enables  an  evaluation 
to  be  taken.    Those  pupils  who  undertake  further  education  at 
vocational  guidance  centres,  and  are  recommended  for  placement 
in  industry  or  sheltered  workshops  are  normally  placed  by  the 
Royal  National  Institute  for  the  Blind  Placement  Officers,  but 
occasionally  are  referred  back  for  placement,  but  a  follow  up 
visit  for  information  is  always  undertaken. 

Referrals. 

After  some  3  years  of  full  time  placement,  former  pupils 
placed  at  A.T.C.  are  now  being  referred  back  for  consultation 
for  extended  training  for  sheltered  workshops.    These  are 
generally  those  pupils  who  were  boarderline  cases  for  rec- 
ommendation for  vocational  guidance,  and  have  taken  full 
advantage  of  the  facilities  offered  by  the  A.T.C. 

continued 


Observations 

Of  the  1976/77  leavers,  the  following  facts  emerge 
which  indicate  the  trend  of  the  future  pattern :- 

Number  leaving  school 29 

Number  requiring  residential  care 11  (3  who  are 

in  care,  5  with  home  deficiencies,  3  require 

hospitalization) 

Number  recommended  for  Adult  Training  Centre.. 17 

Number  recommended  for  further  training 3 

Number  for  full  assessment  because  of  physical 

handicap. . . .1 

TOTAL 32. 

These  totals  do  not  agree  as  included  in  further 
training  is  a  pupil  who  will  finally  require  residential 
care,  and  one  would  benefit  from  further  training  but 
included  in  total  of  17  for  A.T.C.  and  one  pupil  for 
further  physical  assessment  is  included  in  residential 
care. 

CONCLUSION 

The  main  problem  has  been  what  to  omit  from  the  paper 
rather  than  what  to  put  in.   A  work  programme  cannot  succeed 
without  caring,  humane  staff  who  create  the  vital  atmosphere 
necessary  for  learning  and  happiness.   How  can  one  express 
emotion?   I  can  only  trust  I  have  conveyed  something  that 
gives  an  impression  of  our  work  and  life  at  Condover. 


CONDOVER  HALL   SCHOOL  FOR  THE  BLIND 

{Conducted  by  the  Royal  National  Institute  for  the  Blind,  224-8  Great  Portland  Street,  London,  WIN  6AA) 

Telephone:  BAYSTON  HILL  2320  (S.T.D.  code  0743-72)  CONDOVER     HALL 

Station:       SHREWSBURY 

Principal:  ANTHONY  JARVIS  CONDOVER, 


SHREWSBURY, 

SHROPSHIRE,  SY5  7AH 


CURRICULUM  VITAE ANTHONY  JARVIS. 

Age ,...44  years. 

Educated Oswestry  Boys  High  School. 

Served  in  the  Royal  Air  Force  2  years. 

Teacher  training  at  Chester  College  and  Loughbrough  College, 
Honours  diploma  in  Physical  Education. 


Schools;- 

Ellesmere  Modern. 

Faraday  School  (Head  of  P.E.  Dept) 

Condover  Hall 

Passed  College  Of  Teachers  of  the  Blind  examination  1966  gaining 
the  Arthur  Pearson  prize. 

Appointed  Deputy  Headmaster. . .1968 
Appointed  Headmaster 1971 


►      I  serve  on  the  examining  panel  of  the  College  of  Teachers  of 
the  Blind,  and  on  a  working  party  set  up  by  the  Physical 
Education  Association  of  Great  Britain  and  Northern  Ireland  to 
study  physical  education  for  the  handicapped. 


Hobbies 


Reading,  Squash,  Golf,  Football,  Malt  Scotch, 


I  SEMINARIO  BRASILEIRO  DE  EDUCAQAO  DE  DEFICIENTE  AUDIOVISUAL 


SOCIAL-PROFESSIONAL 
INTEGRATION 

by  ROBERT  J.  SMITHDAS,  LHD,  Litt.  D. 


I  SEDAV  -  ABEDEV 


SOCIAL- PROFESSIONAL    :  'ITEORATION 

By 

Robert  J.  Smithdas ,  LHD,  Litt.D. 

Director  of  Community  Education 
Helen  Keller  National  Center  for  Deaf-Blind  Youths  and  Adults 


Integration  of  deaf-blind  persons  into  the  social  and  professional  activities 
of  modern  society  is  a  relatively  new  aspect  of  the  progress  being  made  in  recent 
years  in  overcoming  the  severity  of  the  dual  handicap  of  deafness  and  blindness. 
It  lias  only  been  daring  the  past  twenty-five  years  that  a  small  group  of  deaf- 
blind  individuals  in  the  United  States  have  established  themselves  as  outstanding 
examples  of  success  socially  and  professionally,  thus  setting  new  goals  in  the 
education  and  rehaLi litation  of  the  deaf-blind  and  stimulating  an  accelerated 
interest  in  the  welfare  of  the  deaf-blind  on  an  international  level. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  the  combined  disabilities  of  deafness  and  blinds  ss 
constitute  one  of  the  most  severe  handicaps  known  to  educators  and  workers  in 
rehabilitation.   The  loss  of  both  sight  and  hearing  poses  unique  problems  of 
communication  ,and  mobility  and  other  personal  skills  that  are  generally  con- 
sidered as  essential  and  necessary  for  intelligent  and  active  participation 
in  the  normal  interchange  of  evevydt-iy   affairs.   Sight  and  hearing  are  the-  two 
primary  senses  through  which  an  individual  gleans  knowledge  of  his  environment 
and  its  activities;  and  when  these  two  senses  are  drastically  curtailed  or 
completely  lost,  the  individual's  learning  processes  are  inhibited,  and  the 
world  he  lives  in  literally  shrinks.   To  overcome  the  limitations  thus  imposed 
requires  maximum  use  of  remaining  faculties,  and  a  greater  effort  on  the  part 
of  both  the  deaf-blind  individual  and  those  who  live  and  work  with  him.   In  a 
majority  of  cases,  deaf-blind  individuals  either  lack  speech  or  have  very  limited 
use  of  it,  and  this  added  limitation  makes  it  difficult  for  them  to  express 
their  wants  and  needs  spontaneously. 

Human  beings  are  social  beings,  and  despite  loss  of  sight  and  hearing, 
deaf-blind  people  have  as  great  a  need  for  social  interaction  as  anyone  else. 


(2) 


Skill  in  mobility  and  a  variety  of  communication  methods  are  definite  assets 
in  improving  social  contacts  and  in  broadening  participation  in  social  activities. 
Early  and  continuous  exposure  to  social  situations  help  to  enlarge  the  deaf- 
blind  person's  perspectives  on  what  is  required  of  him  by  society,  and  also  help 
to  develop  confidence  and  acceptable  behavior  patterns.   Such  expos.   ■  should 
include  as  many  facets  of  social  participation  as  possible,  including  recreational 
and  creative  activities,  and  should  be  an  integral  part  of  the  education  and 
rehabilitation  processes  for  the  deaf-blind.   A  wide  range  of  social  activities 
assists  in  emotional  growth  and  the  development  of  initiative  and  motivation. 

Because  of  the  unique  nature  of  this  handicap  and  the  problems  associated 
with  it,  deaf-blind  people  have  a  greater  dependence  on  the  assistance  of  others 
for  acquiring  information  and- establishing  standards  for  personal  initiative. 
independence  for  a  deaf-blind  person,  however  well  adjusted,  is  relative;  for 
most  effective  living,  he  will  often  require  the  assistance  of  other  people 
to  overcome  the  daily  problems  peculiar  to  deafness  and  blindness.   Services 
must  often  be  on  a  one-to-one  basis,  particularly  in  communication.   Although 
today  there  is  a  growing  number  of  aids  and  devices  which  deaf-blind  people 
can  use  to  attain  a  measure  of  independent  living,  and  a  greater  supply  of 
available  reading  materials  to  keep  them  informed,  even  the  most  highly  trained 
and  motivated  deaf-blind  person  frequently  needs  the  services  of  volunteers, 
interpreters,  and  guides  in  order  to  function  at  the  maximum  degree  of  efficien- 
cy, whether  on  a  domestic,  vocational,  or  professional  level.   In  the  United 
States,  during  the  past  thirty  years,  there  has  been  a  marked  increase  in  the 
number  and  quality  of  services  being  provided  for  the  deaf-blind,  which  has  been 
reflected  in  a  corresponding  13 umber  of  deaf-blind  persons  jwho  have  developed 
their  abilities  to  a  high  degree--some  of  whom  have  already  attained  college 
diplomas  and  entered  professional  careers,  and  others  who  are  currently  studying 
..at  the  college  level.   This  should  make  it  apparent  that  improvements  in  educa- 
tional, rehabilitation, '..and  other  services  has  a  direct  effect  on  upgrading  the 
deaf-blind  population  as  a  whole,  and  of  increasing  possible  opportunities  Cot- 
self-expression  and  assimilation  into  society.   But,  as  I  have  already  indicated, 
even  the  most  successful  deaf-Mind  persons  who  are  presently  employed  in  various 
professional  areas,  cannot  Function  at  their  best  without  relying  on    the  assistanc 
of  others. 


(3) 


Currently  the  range  of  professional  opportunities  for  the  highly  trained 
deaf-blind  in  the  United  States  is  limited,  chiei'ly  because  potential  areas  for 
employment  have  not  as  yet  been  fully  analyzed.   We  now  have  dear-blind,  persons 
employed  as  computer  programmers,  program  analysts,  educators,  and  counsel  :>r:  . 
It'  should  be  noted  that  all  these  professional  workers  have  secretaries,  assist- 
ants, or  coworkers  who  assist  them  in  their  daily  work.   It  is  very  probable 
that  this  will  always  be  necessary  because  of  the  limitations  imposed  by  the 
loss  of  sight  and  hearing. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  successful  deaf-blind  persons  in  professional 
careers  are  socially  more  adaptable  than  most  deaf-blind  persons,  because  of 
their  greater  knowledge  and  versatility,  and  the  broader  perspectives  of  life 
they  acquire  in  their  work.   But  they  are  not  wholly  free  from  occasional 
feelings  of  isolation  caused 'by  their  dual  disabilities.   Feelings  of  isolation 
and  loneliness  are  common  to  all  deaf-blind  persons,  but  the  well-adjusted 
individual  experiences  this  less  than  others  because  he  is  more  flexible  in 
his  attitudes  and  can  adjust  to  using  his  mental  and  intellectual  capacities 
to  the  fullest. 

1  believe  that  integration  of  the  deaf-blind  person  on  the  social  and 
professional  levels  depends  for  success  on  a  combination  of  factors:   the 
individual's  overall  personality;  flexibility  to  adjust  to  changing  conditions 
and  situations;  and  whether  the  individual  lives  and  works  in  a  compatible - 
social  climate  that  has  a  realistic  understanding  of  his  needs  and  an  appreci- 
ation of  his  abilities.   it  is  important  for  the  deaf-blind  individual  to 
know  his  limitations  as  well  as  his  potentials;  and  it  is  equally  important 
that  people  who  associate  with  him  have  a  similar  understanding. 

In  summary,  from  .my  own  experleno  ,  I  would  like  to  make  the  following 
suggestions  for  the  integration  of  deaf-blind  people: 

1.   During  formative  years,  every  effort  should  be  made  to  develop  the 
deaf-blind  person's  total  personality  through  education  and  exposure  to  a 
variety  of  social  experiences. 


(h) 


2.  Deaf-blind  persons  should  learn  as  many  methods  of  coimmi.iication  as 
possible  so  that  they  can  adapt  themselves  confidently  to  situations  which  may 
arise. 

3.  Deaf -blind- persons  should  be  encouraged  to  exercise  their  own  initiative 
whenever  possible.   Independence  of  thought  and  action  should  be  encouraged. 

In  the  final  analysis,  integration  will  depend  largely  on  individual 
attitudes.   The  deaf -blind  person  should  be  willing  to  reach  out  to  the  public 
and  assert  his  individuality.   The  individual's  personality  and  adaptability 
is  still  the  primary  key  to  successful  integration  into  any  given  situation. 


Work  with  Deaf -Blind  Children  in  Brazil 

Neusa  Bassetto 

First  of  all,  I  would  like  to  express  my  happiness  and  my 
emotion  in  again  meeting  many  friends,  from  other  countries 
and  from  Brazil,  who  honour  us  with  their  presence  at  this 
Seminar. 

I  also  would  like  to  thank  all  of  those  who  have  encouraged 
me  to  continue  my  work  with  the  deaf -blind. 

The  education  of  the  deaf-blind  person  is  not  only  a  science 
or  an  art,  but,  most  of  all,  it  is  an  act  of  love,  of  dedication 
to  a  human  being  deprived  of  certain  senses  -  hearing  and  sight  - 
and  who,  before  the  community,  before  man  and  before  God,  deserves 
our  care,  our  constant  attention  and  dedication.  This  is 
necessary  so  that  the  bearer  of  these  deficiencies  will  not  be 
pushed  aside  not  only  by  society,  but  also  by  his  own  family,  as 
being  useless,  incapable  of  receiving  special  care  and  taking 
advantage  of  it.  -  Care  that  has  proven  effective  in  its  good 
results. 

Therefore,  this  necessity  is  the  objective  of  my  presentation, 
and  I  am  convinced  that  the  cases  that  I  will  report  on,  cases 
that  I  have  experienced  myself  as  a  teacher  and  which  have  been 
experienced  by  my  dear  pupils,  will  be  beneficial,  not  only  to 
other  teachers,  but  also  to  other  deaf -blind  children. 

I  will  try  to  comment  on  and  demonstrate  each  individual  case, 
with  both  the  corresponding  records  and  with  photographs,  so 
that  you  may  analyse  and  come  to  the  conclusion  that  a  basic, 
but  well  planned  and  specialized  system  should  be  established 
for  the  education  of  the  deaf -blind. 

Experience  has  already  shown  that  the  specialized  education  of 
the  deaf -blind  cannot  be  handled  either  by  a  specialist  in  the 
education  of  the  deaf  or  by  a  specialist  in  the  education  of 


.pg.  2, 


the  blind,  since  the  deaf -blind  person  has  essential  and  well 
defined  characteristics,  entirely  different  from  those  of  the 
deaf  or  of  the  blind. 

Not  less  important  is  the  need,  a  very  urgent  need,  to  begin 
the  technical-professional  training  of  people  who  can  dedicate 
themselves  to  this  difficult,  but  extremely  involving  activity. 

Prior  to  speaking  about  the  cases  that  I  would  like  to  report 
on,  may  I  give  you  a  little  of  our  past  history  in  this 
fascinating  field  which  is  the  education  of  the  deaf -blind. 

Back  in  1971,  when  I  started  to  work  at  the  so  called  "Escola 
Residencial  para  Deficientes  Audiovisuais"  (E.B.D.A.V. ),  in  Sao 
Caetano  do  Sul,  in  the  State  of  Sao  Paulo,  Mrs,  Thereza  Adelina 
Barros  Tavares  was  acting  as  a  teacher,  along  with  our  dear 
teacher  Mrs.  ITice  Tonhozi  de  Saraiva. 

Thereza,  at  that  time,  was  handling  the  teaching  of  two  students, 
who  were  Romualdo  S.  and  Jefeson  S.  My   assignment  was  to 
initiate  the  work  with  a  deaf -blind  child  who  came  from  the 
State  of  Parana  and  who,  unfortunately,  had  to  leave  the  school. 
In  1972,  two  additional  students  came  to  the  E.R.D.A.Y.s  Roberto 
E.  and  Paulo  Cesar  S.  Thereza  began  to  work  with  both  of  them, 
and  I  continued  working  with  both  Romualdo  and  Jefeson.  At  this 
time,  another  teacher  of  the  program  for  hearing-impaired 
children,  Mrs.  Dalvaniee  Farias  Duarte,  became  interested  in  our 
work,  and,  later  on,  she  also  joined  our  program.  Theresa  left 
E.R.D.A.V.  in  1973  and  both  Dalvanise  and  I  began  to  work  with 
the  following  cases: 

Romualdo  S.   -  He  used  to  attend  our  school  in  the  morning  and, 

during  the  afternoon,  he  was  sent  to  a  regular 
school.  We  used  to  keep  very  close  contact  with  his  teacher  at 
this  school,  so  that  Romualdo  could  integrate  and  follow  the 
regular  school  program.  Romualdo  has  completed  the  4th  grade 
of  elementary  school,  and,  since  he  was  now  18  years  old,  he 
started  to  work  at  an  industry  on  the  outskirts  of  Sao  Paulo. 


Pg»3. 


tfrom  there  on,  Romualdo  should  have  received  speech  maintenance 
classes  with  a  speech  training  specialist.  Nevertheless,  we 
believe  that  this  has  not  occurred  for  lack  of  his  financial 
possibilities. 

Jefeson  S.  -   This  student  was  able  to  attain  some  progress 

during  1973  although  he  was  not  using  any  type 
of  language.  He  lived  with  his  grandparents,  who  were  already 
old  and  incapable  of  stimulating  him  and  providing  for  the 
necessary  examinations.  So,  they  sent  him  back  to  his  parents1 
home  in  the  city  of  Presidente  Prudent e,  deep  in  the  State  of 
Sao  Paulo • 

Roberto  B.  -   Born  May,  I960.  He  came  to  the  school  in  June, 
1972. 
Diagnosis 

Sight  :  congenital  cataract,  strabismus  and 
nystagmus.  He  was  submitted  to  a 
cataract  operation  in  January,  1974  o 
Hearing?  deafness  due  meningitis  at  the  age 

of  3  months  with  hypoacusis  resultant 
from  meningoencephalitis. 
Boberto  presented  great  progress  when  he  started  school,  showing 
great  interest  in  all  the  activities,  reacting  very  well  to  all 
the  stimulation  that  he  was  exposed  to.  He  also  showed  great 
progress  in  comprehending  his  environment,  and  most  of  all,  an 
interest  in  expressing  his  feelings,  when  he  learned  Braille. 
The  world  began  to  have  meaning  for  Roberto;  he  could  do  things 
and,  obviously,  he  wanted  to  communicate  what  he  felt  and  noticed, 
When  his  cataracts  were  operated  on,  in  1974,  Roberto  showed  new 
and  greater  progress.  He  rejected  Braille,  since  he  could  now 
perceive  enlarged  letters  and  the  world  surrounding  him.  His 
hearing  gained  the  most,  in  spite  of  the  faot  that  his  audio- 
metric  test  remained  unchanged,  Presently,  Roberto  does  not 
present  greater  progress  due  to  evident  neurological  problems 
and  to  emotional  difficulties  that  have  occurred.  He  does  not 


pg.  4. 

tolerate  any  physical  contact  which,  in  terms  of  obtaining  oral 
language,  prevents  him  from  proper  articulation,  thus  making 
compreehensive  speech  impossible.  His  vocabulary  is  limited, 
but  he  can  express  and  understand  through  finger  spelling, 
enlarged  writing  and  drawings.  His  gestural  language  is  not 
comprehensive.  Roberto  accepts  and  tolerates  finger  spelling 
since  this  is  the  only  means  that  he  utilizes  to  communicate, 
besides  enlarged  writing  and  drawings. 

Paulo  Cesar  S.  -  Born  August,  1969*  He  came  to  the  school  in 
August,  1972. 
Etiology  :  perinatal  suffering;  H.H.  genetic 

factor. 
Diagnosis 

Sight   :  The  examination  conducted  under 
general  anesthesis  reported: 
"...he  does  not  present  organic 
lesion,  anamnesis  being  the 
possible  central  cause" • 
Hearing  :  500Hz  1000Hz  2000Hz  4000Hz 
Db  loss    40     50      50      60 

Neurologic:  "...  he  does  not  have  either 
hearing  or  sight  disturbance; 
perhaps  it  is  a  defect  of 
perception  related  to  brain 
damage" • 
yaulo  Cesar  was  sent  to  us  because,  according  to  his  parents: 

, .  The  child  could  not  see  or  hear".  We  began  the  stimulation 
e    "ound  out  that  Paulo  Cesar  really  did  not  respond  to  visual 
stimulation  but  he  could  follow  the  teacher  in  her  lullabies. 
We  asked  for  medical  examinations  and  found  that  the  child  also 
did  not  ha^   either  hearing  or  sight  problems,  but  neurological 
problems,  and  his  behavior  problem  was  being  characterized  by 
autism.  We  worked  with  this  child  twice  a  week,  during  the 
years  of  1973,  1974,  and  1975.  In  1976,  I  explained  to  his 
parents  that  the  continuation  of  our  work  would  be  fruitless  if 


£>£>•        ->• 


both  the  child  and  his  parents  would  not  receive  treatment  in: 
ludotherapy  for  the  child 
parent  therapy  for  the  parents 

By  the  end  of  1976,  family  resistance  was  tremendous,  and  they 
stated  that  the  "Child  would  never  learn,  so  the  best  thing  to 
do  would  be  to  give  up".  That  is  what  they  did  at  the  beginning 
of  this  year,  Paulo  Cesar  is  no  longer  with  us. 

Maria  Aparecida  S.  -  Born  May,  1964.  She  came  to  the  school 

in  the  latter  part  of  1975  upon  great 
insistence  by  a  friend  of  her  family  who  already  knew  our  work. 
But,  her  parents  did  not  believe  that  something  could  be  done 
in  terms  of  education.  When  Maria  Aparecida  came  to  the  school, 
she  was  wearing  eyeglasses,  but  not  hearing-  aid.  We  only  had 
contact  with  her  mother  as  her  father  took  no  part  in  the  problemi 
This  girl  was  11  years  old  when  she  was  sent  to  the  school  and 
was  not  toilet  trained  (she  still  wore  diapers),  and  she  was 
usually  fed  liquids  and  soft  baby-food.  In  order  to  eontrol  her 
behavior,  the  family  used  to  give  her  tranquilizers.  So,  her 
daily  life  was: 

-  to  wake  up  at  2:00  HK; 

-  to  have  lunch,  and  play  on  the  couch  or  in 
bed  until  supper  time; 

-  supper  at  7:00  PMj 

-  back  to  bed  at  8:00  PM; 

She  did  not  have  any  other  type  of  activity.  Her  glasses  she 
used  only  when  going  to  school,  since  ..."with  them,  Maria  Apa- 
recida sees  things  and  she  wants  to  touch  them,  giving  me  a  lot 
of  work",  said  her  mother.  In  order  for  the  child  to  start 
classes  in  the  beginning  of  1976,  we  asked  her  mother  to  train 

her  in: 

-  toilet  use 

-  eating 

-  the  reducing  of  sleeping  time,  giving  her  some 
activity  at  home 

In  February,  1976,  Maria  Aparecida  was  a  more  mature  child  and 


after  some  training  she  was  "being  able  to  work  for,  at  least, 
two  consecutive  hours.  She  began  to  accept  the  company  of 
other  children;   she  started  to  show  preference  for  certain 
activities;  she  has  acquired  greater  independence  and  sureness 
in  walking,  in  eating,  in  dressing  and  in  her  hygiene.  She  was 
able  to  associate  hearing  stimulation  to  movements,  as  well  as 
to  respond  to  simple  gestures.  The  "new"  Maria  Aparecida  was 
emerging  and  asking  for  attention,  and  it  seemed  to  us  that  she 
jsras  becoming  "heavy"  for  her  family,  who  began  to  say  that  it 
was  becoming  difficult  to  take  her  to  school.  So,  they  took  her 
away  from  our  school  at  the  end  of  1976. 

Cizino  S»    -  Born  April,  1967.  He  came  to  the  school  in 
April,  1976. 
Diagnosis: 

Sight  s  Hypoplasia  papilla  (probable) 

Secondary  converging  strabismus  (?) 
Amblyopia 
Hearing:  "...  he  did  not  respond  to  4000  Hz; 

little  response  at  2000Hz  and  normal 
response  at  1000Hz". 
Neurological:  mental  retardation  (?) 
Cizino *s  parents  lack  rudimentary  instruction,  and  they  lived  in 
very  poor  conditions  in  a  slum.  Therefore,  Cizino' s  medical 
examinations  were  conducted  in  the  indigent  sector  of  a  hospital. 
The  examinations  are  not  concluded  thus  far,  because  during  the 
second  half  of  1976  until  today,  his  father  has  been  sick  in  a 
hospital  and  his  mother  is  also  sick  at  home,  making  it  impossible 
to  give  continuity  to  his  examinations.  He  does  not  take  any 
medicine.  He  came  to  the  school  already  trained  to  go  to  the 
toilet  and  able  to  eat  by  himself,  but  he  does  not  chew  his  food 
yet.  He  also  has  some  independence  in  dressing.  He  responds 
very  well  to  hearing,  visual  and  gestural  stimulation.  He  has 
learned  basic  gestural  communication,  such  as: 


-  come  here 

-  sit  down 

-  get  up 

-  go  to  the  toilet 

-  go  wash  your  hands 

-  go  to  eat 

He  has  great  interest  in  people,  and,  when  somebody  gets  close 
to  him  he  tries  to  find  out,  through  touch,  whther  they  are  using 
a  hearing  aid.   He  likes  hearing  training  and  appreciates  the 
teacher's  voice,  trying  to  imitate  simple  words  of  the  oral 
communication,  but  without  understanding  them.  He  is  showing 
great  interest  in  visual  environment  and  tries  to  cope  with  it. 
He  presents  general  motor  difficulty  and  a  certain  lack  of  tactile 
perception.  He  has  good  ability  in  transferring  classroom 
learning  to  other  situations. 

Paula  Andrea  A.  -  Born  April,  1975.  She  came  to  the  school  in 
August,  1976, 
Diagnosis 

Sight   2  retrolenthal  fibroplasia 
Hearing  j  200Hz  500Hz  1000Hz  1500Hz  2006Hz 
Db  loss    70     90     100      80     ? 
Her  parents  try  to  do  everything  that  may  lead  to  good  training 
for  Paula.  Her  mother  receives  orientation  given  by  a 
Physiotherapist  regarding  the  motor  development  of  the  child. 
Paula  is  very  sensitive  to  certain  foods  which  cause  her  allergies 
and  which  require  constant  medical  control.  She  does  not  take  any 
medicine. 

Feeding  :-  she  is  able  to  drink:  liquids  by  herself,  holding  the 
glass  or  cup.  She  does  not  use  a  spoon  yet,  and  she 
needs  help  in  order  to  eat.  She  eats  well,  accepting 
any  type  of  food. 
Toilet  s-  she  is  not  trained  yet. 

Dressing:-  she  is  able  to  take  her  shoes  off  and  her  socks. 
Social  behavior:-  she  distinguishes  between  the  activities  given 
either  by  her  father  or  her  mother  and  those  by  other 
persons.  In  other  words,  she  has  become  used  to  eacb 


■P3« 


individual  type  of  play  or  contact,  and  only  accepts 

them  from  those  whom  she  has  become  used  to. 
Body  imitation:-  she  does  not  imitate,  "but  does  understand  when 

mother  makes  gestures  on  the  child's  "body, 
Heaction  to  speech:-  she  shows  interest  when  someone  speaks  close 

to  her  ear  or  when  she  is  using  the  hearing  aid,  although 

she  does  not  voice  when  using  the  aid. 
Gestures 

Receptive:  she  reacts  to  signs  made  on  her  arms,  hands 
and  "body:-  to  eat 

-  to  drink 

-  get  up 

-  come  here 

-  let's  take  a  bath 

-  let's  go  to  the  toilet 

-  let's  go  to  sleep 

-  push 

-  it  is  finished 

-  no 

-  yes 

Expressive:-  to  eat 

-  to  push 

-  no 

-  yeas 

Visual,  reaction:  she  shows  reaction  to  very  intensive  light. 

She  does  not  perceive  any  other  visual  stimulation, 

Reaction  to  sound:  she  does  not  imitate.  She  only  voices  when 

she  is  playing  and  is  not  using  the  hearing  aid. 

Toys   :  she  is  able  to  manipulate.  When  she  is  playing,  she 
does  not  give  objects  to  anybody  and,  should 
the  object  fall  from  her  hands,  she  looks  for 
them  with  her  hands,  in  front  of  her  and  on 
both  sides.  She  enjoys  intensive  physical 
activities. 


Motor  development:   she  holds  small  objects  with  one  hand 

and  uses  both  hands  for  bigger  objects. 
She  climbs  up  and  down  chairs  and  stairs t 
She  does  not  walk  alone,  but  is  abllfe  to  do  so 
if  supported  by  a  wall* 
This  year,  Paula  Andrea  is  not  attending  school  because  State 
Law  does  not  allow  children  to  attend  school  prior  to  being  3 
years  old.  There  are  not  specialized  clinics  dedicated  to  the 
whole  care  of  the  child.  They  propose  speech-hearing  training, 
assistance  in  visual  problems,  etc.,  but  there  is  no  integration 
in  these  areas. 

Maria  Amelia  L.  -  Born  February,  1969*  She  came  to  the  school 
in  March,  1977. 
Etiology:  maternal  rubella. 


Sight:  congenital  cataract  in  the  right  eye 
Hearing:  250Hz  500Hz  1000Hz  3000Hz 
Db  loss   35     45     75     75 
Congenital  heart  disease  (she  was  operated 
in  the  latter  part  of  1975). 
Maria  Amelia  also  came  to  the  school  without  any  toilet  and  feeding 
training.  Her  parents  needed  proper  orientation  so  that  this 
training  could  be  given.  Maria  Amelia's  present  conditions  are: 

Sight   :  good  perception  and  she  gets  very  interested  in  details. 

She  does  not  make  visual  contacts,  even  to  the  point  of 

systematically  avoiding  them. 
Hearing  :  she  does  not  respond  to  any  sound  stimulation,  whether 

using  a  hearing  aid  or  not.  Nevertheless,  she  likes 

to  use  the  hearing  aid. 
Social  behavior:  Maria  Amelia  likes  the  company  of  other  children, 

although  she  prefers  to  be  among  adults. 


pg.  10. 

Communication: 

Gestures  -  receptive  language:-  come  here 

-  stand  up 

-  sit  down 

-  close  the  door 

-  go  wash  you  hands 

-  let's  eat 

-  it  is  finished 
expressive  language? 

she  does  not  make  any  signs  or  gesture, 
but,  when  she  wants  something,  she  takes 
the  hand  of  the  adult  and  takes  him  to 
the  desired  object. 
Motor  "behavior  i   good  walking,  but  with  a  poor  general  balance. 

Her  overall  and  specific  coordination  is  deficient, 
Emotional  behavior:  low  frustration  level;  low  resistance  to 
fatigue  in  school  work;  very  dependent. 

These  are  the  most  significant  cases  that  I  thought  would  be  of 
interest  to  this  audience,  I  have  also  attended  other  cases  of 
children  from  other  cities  in  our  country,  but  they  cannot 
attend  our  school,  because  this  institution  is  not  a  residential 
school  and  the  moving  of  their  parents  would  result  in  upsetting 
de  family  dynamics. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  we  urgently  need  to  establish  a  well 
planned,  realistic,  scientific  and  well  coordinated  program  for 
very  specialized  care  and  treatment  of  the  deaf -blind.  The 
efforts  of  everyone  involved  and/or  concerned  with  these  problems 
should  be  duly  concentrated  in  order  to  establish  a  logical, 
consistent  and  humanitary  program. 

This  is,  I  am  sure,  one  of  the  main  reasons  for  our  being  here 
at  this  Seminar.  And,  as  one  of  the  participants  in  the  very 
recent  I  World  Conference  on  Services  to  Deaf-Blind  Youths  and 
Adults,  held  in  New  York  City,  last  September,  I  think  that  it 
would  be  needless  for  me  to  add  more  comments  in  addition  to  what 


I  have  presented  to  you  today.   So,  I  would  ask  you  to  remember 
the  Declaration  of  Rights  of  Deaf -Blind  Persons,  adopted  "by  that 
very  important  Conference,  and  which  was  sent  to  us  "by  our  dear 
Dr.  Hi chard  Kinney, 

Before  ending  my  presentation,  I  would  like  to  inform  you  that 
the  "Escola  Residencial  para  Beficientes  Audio vi suai s" ,  which 
was  a  State  school,  in  September  of  this  year  became  a  Foundation, 
named  "Fundacao  Municipal  Annie  Sullivan",  We  are  very  happy 
with  this  decision,  and  we  all  are  waiting  for  the  next  school 
year  (February  1978)  to  start  our  work  there,  with  our  deaf -blind 
children© 

Thank  you  very  much. 

**  ***  ** 


I  SEMINARIO  BRASILEIRO  DE  EDUCAQAO  DE  DEFICIENTE  AUDIOVISUAL 


ATTEMPTS  TO  IMPLANT  DEAF-BLIND 

EDUCATION  IN  BRAZIL 


PROF.  NICE  TONHOZI  SARAIVA 


I  SEDAV  -  ABEDEV 


ATTSLIPTS  T0  IMpLAI^p  DEAP-BUKD  EDUCATION 
III  BRAZIL 

Prof.  Nice  Tonhozi  de  Saraiva 

It  is  an  arduous  task,  through  at  the  same  time,  exciting  to  face 
the  challenge  of  initiating  a  new  enterprise  in  the  field   of 
specialized  education. 

Allow  me  to  present  to  you  this  new  effort  in  our  country.  In  1950, 
during  my  specialized  course  on  teaching  the  blind,  I  had  the 
opportunity  to  read  about  the  life  of  Helen  Keller,  the  famous  deaf- 
blind  American  woman,  and  her  teacher,  Annie  Sullivan,   In  1953, 
Helen  Keller  visited  Brazil  and  impressed  us  very  much  by  her   ex- 
traordinary personality  which,  although  so  limited,  conquered  all 
obstacles,  acquiring  vast  culture,  becoming  the  syz&bol  of  the  fight 
for  the  benefit  of  the  blind  and  deaf -blind. 

In  my  thirty- two  years  of  teaching,  my  most  emotional  moment  was 
when  I  got  to  know  Helen  Keller.  I  realized  that  she  was  exactly 
as  I  &ad  read  in  her  books  and,  without  exaggeration,  her  life  story 
was  not  fiction.  I  cannot  describe  my  emotion  when  her  hand  touched 
my  face  and  she  understood  what  I  said.  At  that  moment,  I  remember- 
ed Annie  Sullivan  and  all  I  had  read  about  her  endeavors  to  liberate 
Helen  Keller  from  the  isolation  in  which  she  lived.  At  that  moment, 
I  decided  that  I  had  to  be  a  teacher  for  the  deaf -blind. 

Once  a  professor  of  the  blind,  I  studied  a  course  of  specialized 
education  of  the  deaf  in  Rio  de  Janeiro,  whose  directress  was  Dona 
Ana  Maria  Eimoli  de  Faria  Doria^fwhose  presence  in  this  course 
honored  her  students. 

With  these  two  special  studies,  I  felt  more  sure  in  my  realization 
of  my  ideal.   Having  entered  in  contact  with  the  Perkins  School 
for  the  Blind  in  Watertown,  L'lassachusetts,  in  the  United  States, 
I  was  able  to  obtain  a  scholarship  in  Special  Education  for  the 


Attempts  to  Implant  Deaf -Blind.  Education  in  Brazil  Pg.2, 


the  deaf -blind  -  through  Br,  Edward  Waterhouse,  who  is  honoring  us 
today  with  his  presence. 

With  the  authorisation  of  the  Governor  of  Sao  Paulo  and  US$50,00 
monthly  from  the  Itamarati,  in  I960,  seven  years  after  Helen  Keller's 
visit  to  Brazil,  I  went  to  the  United  States.  I  classified  for  my 
certificate  and  thus,  in  June  of  1961,  one  might  say  I  officially 
"began  the  education  of  the  deaf -blind  in  Brazil. 

Soon  after  my  return  to  Brazil,  from  the  then  existing  National 
Campaign  for  the  Education  of  the  Blind,  1  succeeded  in  obtaining 
an  appropriation  for  the  creation  of  a  division  of  the  Education 
of  Audiovisual  Handicapped  in  the  Foundation  for  the  Bookjof  the 
Blind  in  Brazil,  whose  president,  B.  Borina  de  G-ouvea  Ncwill,  gave 
me  free  liberty  in  this  function.  B.  Borina  is  also  participating 
in  our  seminar « 

THE  HJiST   SPECIALISED  CLASS  POE  BEAP-BLIHD 

This  class  lasted  for  one  and  a  half  years  with  two  students:   one 
of  ten  years  of  age,  deaf  with  0.1  vision,  and  the  other,  completely 
blind  and  no  one  knew  her  level  of  deafness  and  intellectuality. 
The  first  showed  great  possibilities  of  education,  while  the 
second  remained  a  question  mark  as  to  intellectual  and  hearing  levels, 
After  some  time  for  observation  and  with  a  medical  diagnosis  in 
severe  mental  deficiency,  the  girls,  was  interned  in  a  special 
institution  for  her  case. 

While  I  worked  with  these  two  girls,  I  could  see  how  many,  things . they 
assimilated.   It  seemed  nothing  had  been  given  them.  However,  we 
know,  for  the  deaf-blind,  a  little  is  a  lot:  learning  to  chew,  to 
dress,  to  move  freely,  to  have  independence  in  physiological  needs 
and  principally,  to  have  a  means  of  communication.  For any  human 
being,  this  is  as  important  as  any  school  routine. 


Attempts  to  Implant  Deaf -Blind  Education  in  Brazil       ■    pg.3, 


TEACHERS  TRAINING  IN  BRAZIL 

In  this  period,  during  a  speech  at  the  Foundation  for  the  Book  of 
the  Blind,  two  teachers  of  blinds,  Thereza  Adelina  Barros  Tavares 
and  Dinah  Soega  Badra,  became  interested  in  this  field  of  study* 
D.  Borina  gave  them  authorization  to  specialize  in  the  education 
of  deaf  handicapped,  and  at  the  same  'time  received  training  in  the 
education  of  the  deaf -blind* 

A  regular  teacher,  D.  Nely  de  Paula,  with  experience  in  teaching 

the  blind,  received  training  in  the  classes  for  the  deaf -blind,       < 

working  with  us  until  the  end  of  the  classes* 

THE  I'JID  0?  THE  FIRST  CLASS  TOR  DEAP-BII&D 

In  November  of  1963,  one  and  a  half  years  after  its  beginning,  by 
requirements  of  the  Institute  for  the  Blind  "Padre  Chico" ,  the 
class  was  closed.   At  this  time  only  Thereza  stayed  at  lay  side, 
dedicated  to  fight  with  me,  sharing  the  frustrations  and  heart- 
breaks*  A  ja±>  which  we  started  so  enthusiastically  seemed  to  be 
falling  apart.  And  we  could  seem  to  do  little  or  nothing. 

After  our  discouragement,  we  resolved  to  continue  our  fight  because 
the  Division  remained  confident,  counting  on  the  support  of  the 
Foundation  for  the  Book. 

The  two  girls  were' sent  to  specialized  institutions  in  the 
interior  of  the  State  of  Sao  Paulo.  Bona  Abgail  Calera,  founder  of 
the  Lar  Nosso  ITinho,  in  Araraquara,  accepted  one  of  the  girls,  and 
the  other,  with  severe  mental  problems,  lives  in  an  institution  in 
Atibaia,  which  is  spe  dalized  in  under--,  id  children  without  any 
possibility  for  education. 

And  we  are  still  looking  for  a  place  to  install  a  school,  or  at 
least  a  class.   Leaf -Blind  children  still  have  no  school  -  but  not 
all  our  work  is'  lost;   in  the  end,  education  is  not  always  classified 
by  its  losses*   It  is  a  fight  we  continue.   One  day  the  planted  seed 


Attempts  to  Implant  Deaf -Blind  Education  in  Brazil  pg.4o 


will  give  fruit,  even  if  it  is  we  that  cannot  make  this  harvest. 
This  is  not  important.  Others  will. 

THE  SECTOR  0?  EDUCATION  FOB  THE  AUDIOVISUAL  HANDICAPPED  -  SE3AY 

The  first  and  most  difficult  step  had  already  been  made:  to  conquer 
the  public  interest  for  a  work  on  Education  of  the  Deaf -Blind. 
The  principal  aims  were; 

-  Orientation  of  the  school  or  special  class; 

-  Researchs  for  the  proper  localization  of  the  cases; 

-  Guidance  for  these  localized  cases; 

-  Heading  abilities  and  communication  for  adults; 

-  Training  of  teachers; 

-  Information  and  instructive  speeches  for  the  community. 

TBANSPEKEHCE  OP  THE  SECTOR  TO  THE  STATE 

After  sometime  with  the  8EDAY,  we  considered  it  wiser  to  transfer 
the  new  service  to  the  control  of  the  State,  in  order  to  consolidate 
the  beginning  taken  which  was  of  a  personal  character. 

the 
The   Sector  of  Education  and  Assistance  forA Audio visual  Handicapped 

was  created,  Law  n2  75,  of  May  21,  1964,  under  the  existing  service 

of  Education  for  the  Deaf;  at  that  time,  the  Director  was  Mr.  Jorge 

G-adig,  greatly  interested  in  our  work*  Dona  Dorina  agreed  with  the 

transference  of  the  teachers.   One  of  these,  Dona  Dinah  Zoegra, 

preferred  to  continue  with  the  blind,  and  stayed  with  the  Foundation. 

We   are  continuing  with  the  education  of  the  public,  and  also  assi^bing 
with  home  care  of  two  adults  in  3ao  Paulo,  a  child  in  Sao  Caetano 
do  Sul  and  another  in  Santo  Andre.   One  child  dn  Belo  Horizonte 
continued  to  correspond  with  us  in  the  hope  of  a  "place  in  the  Sun". 


Attempts  to  Implant  Deaf -Blind  Education  in  Brazil  pg.5, 


Until  today  she  stays  living  in  a  dark  world,  silent,  caused  "by 
her  double  deficiency,  without  any  hope  of  orientation.  Her  oral 
language  is  incomprehensible*  She  communicates  by  Braille  and 
manual  alphabet.   She  still  hopes  for  some  orientation  to  this  day. 

And  the  porpaganda  to  the  public,  to  clarify  the  difficulty  of 
these  people,  continued.  Prom  those  who  heard  us,  we  received 
emotional  applause.  But  they  could  not  do  anything  to  help  us  in 
this  beginning  of  a  class  or  a  school* 

< 

A  SCHOOL  FOE  AUDIOVISUAL  HA3TOICAPFED 

One  day,  we  received  a  process  coming  from  the  Legislature*  It 
contained  the  Law  of  Representative  Oswaldo  Massei,  of  Sao  Caetano 
do  Sul*  dealing  with  the  creation  of  a  school  for  the  handicapped 
in  that  city,  to  join  together  children  with  all  the  mental  and 
physical  handicaps.   In  order  to  justify  our  point  of  view  to  the 
contrary,  but  recognising  the  humane  feelings  of  this  Representative, 
we  clarified  that  each  problem  child  needs  specialised  care  and 
technical  attention*   We  took  advantage  of  this  opportunity  to 
divulge  our  plan  to  create  a  special  school  for  audiovisual 
handicapped,  since,  until  that  time,  we  had  not  been  able  to  open 
a  class  or  a  school  to  attend  deaf -blind  people*  The  Representative 
promised  to  make  (-very   effort  and  to  approach  the  Mayor  of  Sao 
Oaetano  do  Sul  to  bring  to  realisation  such  a  plan.  And  thus, 
thanks  to  the  comprehension  of  Mayor  Heraogones  Salter  Braido  - 
Municipal  Law  nfi  170,  of  August  9,  1968  -  of  Sao  Caetano  do  Sul  - 
was  created  in  Brazil  the  First  Eesi&encial  School  for  the  Audio- 
visual Handicapped  -  EltDAV* 

line   school  attended  four  types  of  deficiencies: 

1.  totally  deaf  and  blind 

2.  totally  deaf  -  partially  blind 
3*  totally  blind  -  partially  deaf 
4.  partially  deaf  and  blind 


Attempts  to  Implant  Deaf -Blind  Education  in  Brazil  pg.6, 


and  also  aimed  to  prepare  technicians  for  the  decentralization 
of  teaching  in  Brazil  and  the  creation  of  a  Center  for  Studies  and 
Scientific  Investigation,  Me  to  administrative  exigencies,  EEDAV 
attended  only  students  with  auditive  handicaps*  EHDAV  operated  in 
colabo ration  with  the  Municipality  and  the  State  through  an  agreement: 

The   lamicipality  would  be  in  charge  of 

1.  Ceding  a  school  building 

2.  I£aintenance  of  the  building 

3.  Material  and  equipment 

4.  Salary  of  the  caretakers 

5.  Salary  of  the  workers 

The   State  would  be  in  charge  of  giving 

1.  Technical  staff 

2.  Pedagogical  material  and  special  equipment 
3*  Technical  and  bureaucratic  orientation 

Since  the  beginning  of  1969,  I  have  ^oeen   separated  from  the  Service 
for  Special  Education  of  the  State  and  from  the  Institute  for  the 
Blind  "Padre  Chico"  and  was  put  to  the  disposition  of  the  Municipality 
of  Sao  Oaetano  do  Sul,  in  accordance  with  Clause  V  of  the  agreement, 
to  install  and  put  to  work  the  EEDAV*  The  officer  in  charge  of  the 
Service  for  Special  Education  of  the  State,  D.  luisa  Banducci  Isnardi, 
transferred  Professor  Theresa  Adelina  Barros  Tavares,  obeying  the 
same  Clause,  to  serve  the  PEDAY. 

In  1970,  Professor  Heusa  Bassetto  was  chosen  for  specialized  studies 
on  education  for  the  deaf-blind  in  the  United  States 0   At  our  appeal, 
P.  Maria  do  Canao  ae  Abreu  Sodre,  at  that  time  Pirst  Lady  of  the 
•State  of  Sao  Paulo,  colaborated  in  helping  with  the  costs  during 
Heusa' a  stay  in  the  United  States.  Dona  Maria  do  Carmo  colaborated 
also  with  the  school,  guaranteeing  food  for  students  and  workers 
during  a  certain  period. 


Attempts  to  Implant  Deaf -Blind  Education  in  Brazil  pg,  7, 


In  August  of  1970,  it  was  arranged  for  a  directress  of  a  municipal 
school,  Professor  Vitalina  Manrique,  to  be  responsible  for  the 
administration  of  the  School. 

In  1971,  I  retired  from  EEDAV,  tranquil,  as  I  left  in  my  place 
Neusa  Basse tto  and  Thereza  Adelina,  two  highly  qualified  persons  to 
continue  the  work  I  had  started*  But  I  did  not  abandon  my  work. 
As  I  said  before,  Education  is  not  only  the  lessons  we  give, 
Voluntarily,  I  continued  my  contribution,  staying  close  to  the 
movement  in  the  field  of  education  of  deaf -blind  people. 

When  I  left  ERDAV,  the  technical  sector  was  composed  of:  doctor, 
phonoaudiologist,  psychiatrist,  social  worker,  occupational 
therapist,  teachers  of  deaf  handicapped  and  deaf-blind,  and  an 
auxiliary  in  kindergarten.  Ten  temporary  classes  were  created, 

taught  by  teachers  of  deaf -blind,  deafs,  physical  education, 

Ho 

industrial  arts,  music,  social  workers  and  a  phdau&iologist*  Six 

teachers  were  commissioned  to  take  care  of  the  administrative 
functions,  one  being  a  teacher  specialized  in  the  education  of 
deaf -blind  and  another  one  trained  in  the  field.   This  teacher, 
Dalvsnise,  took  her   training  in  1975-76, 

Due  to  political-administrative  implications,  the  convention  was 
denounced  by  the  State*   This  "fceing  the  case,  the  EEDAV  became 
extinct,  having  created  five  classes  joined  to  the  State  School 
of  1st  and  2nd  degree  in  Vila  Santa  Maria  in  Sao  Caetano  do  Sul, 
Of  these  five  classes,  four  are,  dealing  with  auditive  deficiencies 
and  one  for  deaf -blind  children. 

In  1974,  Professor  Thereza  Adelina  Barros  Tavares  moved  from  Sao 
Paulo,  thus  leaving  the  teaching  of  the  deaf -blind  to  the 
responsibility  of  Professor  Neusa  Bassetto.  At  the  same  time, 
having  finished  her  term,  the  Administrative  Directress,  Vitalina 
Manrique,  also  left  the  school.   Dr.  Ruth  Delic  took  over  the  direction 
and  spared  no  efforts  to  reorganize  the  school.   It  was  necessary 


Attempts  to  Implant  Beaf -Blind  Education  in  Brazil  pg.8, 


to  continue  the  school*,  A  job  started  with  so  much  profit 
could  not  die,   This  is  what  thinks  the  President  of  the  Brazilian 
Association  for  Education  of  the  Visually  Handicapped,  Professor 
Geraldo  Sandoval  de  Andrade.   Shanks  to  the  movement  promoted  by 
the  ABEDBY,  the  program  for  the  education  of  deaf -blind  people  is 
being  reactivated*   his  important  seminar  is  a  proof  of  this. 
Bringing  technicians  and  deaf -blind  people  from  other  countries, 
the  Brazilian  Association  for  the  Education  of  the  Visually 
Handicapped  -  AB'EBEY,  is  giving  us  an  opportunity  to  up-date  our 
knowledge,  to  hear  marvelous  testimonials  of  life  experiences  of 
great  leaders  who  are  deaf-blind,  and  in  this  way,  through  facts  and 
methods,  to  demonstrate  to* the  Brazilian  community  1*he  possibility 
for  social-professional  recuperation  of  the  de;;f -blind. 

The  Municipality  of  3ao  Oaetano  do  Sul  is  actively  colabo rating 
in  the  resurgence  of  this  program,  creating  situations  and  juridical 
structure  for  the  Besidencial  School  for  the  Blind  -  EEBAV,  in  such 
a  way  that  it  can  continue  its  mission  without  having  to  run  the 
r5rV  r-r   "being  doubted  and  questioned  and  seeing  its  activities 
being  interrupted. 

The  'seed  planted  in  I960  begins  to  fruit  seventeen  years  later. 
It  is  BBBAV  which  is  being  reborn  to  care  for  the  deaf -blind  and 
where  they  can  look  for  an  opportunity  to  educate  themselves,  freeing 
themselves  from  the  barriers  of  their  doube  handicap  and  shewing  up 
to  what  point  the  human  being  can  react  and  grow  facing  the  most 
terrible  of  limits  which  nature,  at  times,  put  in  his  way.  The 
vital  energy  of  a  person  may  throw  him  into  the  future  and  give  him 
the  possibility  of  acquiring  equipment  and  mechanisms  of  personality 
so  that  he  can  conquer  the  hostilities  of  every  day  life. 


to  Paulo,  October,  1977. 


**#  -***  **#- 


CUBEICULUM  VITAE 

NICE  TONHOZI  DE  SARAIVA 

1945  -  Teacher  for  Elementary  School  "by  the  Institute  of  Education 

"Padre  Anehieta"  -  Sao  Paulo  -  Brasil 
1975  -  Supervisor  Teacher,  School  of  Education  "Sao  Marcos"  -  Sao  Paulo 

1950  -  Teacher  for  the  Blind,  by  the  Institute  of  Education  "Caetano 
de  Campos  -  Sao  Paulo 

-  Teacher  for  the  Deaf  by  the  National  Institute  of  Education 
for  the  Deaf  -  Rio  de  Janeiro 
1961  -  Teacher  for  the  Deaf -Blind  by  the  Perkins  School  for  the 
Blind,  Watertown,  Massachusetts,  U.S.A. 

Ex-Teacher  (retired)  of  the  State  for  the"Padre  Chico"  Institute 
for  the  Blind, 1946/1971. 

Presently  acting  as  Supervisor  Teacher  of  the  Special  Branch  for 
the  Education  of  the  Blind  and  the  Deaf  at  the  Municipality  of 
Sao  Bernardo  do  Campo  -  SP. 


06/29/2012 
T 265314  5  1